Home

Aria Soho user manual - MBC

1. 49 2 4 12 Headset 51 2 4 13 Intercom Signal Mode 52 2 4 14 Intercom Tenancy Group 53 2 4 15 Message Wait Call Back 54 2 4 16 Music On Hold MOH 55 2 4 17 Mute 57 2 4 18 Message Wait Indication MWI SLT Feature 57 2 4 19 On Hook Dialing 58 2 4 20 Station Name 58 2 4 21 Station Programming 6
2. 121 2 13 10 ICM Box Music Selection 122 2 13 11 Station Feature Cancel 122 2 13 12 DSS DLS Consoles 123 2 14 Traffic Analysis 124 2 14 1 Attendant Reports 125 2 14 2 Call Reports 126 2 14 3 CO Reports 127 2 14 4 Hardware H W Unit Usage Reports 128 2 15 Software Upgrade 129 2 15 1 USB 130 2 15 2 LA
3. 12 2 2 6 Hot Line amp Warm Line 13 2 2 7 Least Call Routing 14 2 2 8 Memory Dialing 17 2 2 9 Private Line 24 2 3 Rerouting 25 2 3 1 Call Forward 25 2 3 2 Call Transfer 32 2 3 3 Holding and Parking 34 2 3 4 Pick up 37 2 4 Call Handling
4. 30 3 3 1 System Attributes I PGM 160 30 3 3 2 System Attributes II PGM 161 32 3 3 3 ADMIN Password PGM 162 35 3 3 4 Alarm Attributes PM 163 35 3 3 5 Attendant Assignment PGM 164 36 3 3 6 Auto Attendant VMIB Announcement PGM 165 36 3 3 7 CO to CO COS PGM 166 37 3 3 8 DISA Destination PGM 167 37 3 3 9 External Control Contact PGM 168 39 3 3 10 LCD Time Date Language Display Mode PGM 169 40 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 II 3 3 11 Modem Assignment PGM 170
5. 41 3 3 12 Music Assignment PGM 171 41 3 3 13 PBX Access code PGM 172 43 3 3 14 PLA Priority Setting PGM 173 43 3 3 15 RS 232C Port Setting PGM 174 44 3 3 16 Print Port Selection PGM 175 45 3 3 17 Pulse Dial Ratio PGM 176 47 3 3 18 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Attributes PGM 177 47 3 3 19 System Time Date Setting PGM 178 50 3 3 20 Linked Station Pairs PGM 179 50 3 4 System Timers PGM 180 182 51 3 4 1 System Timers I PGM 180 51
6. 68 3 7 LCR PGM 220 223 69 3 7 1 LCR Attributes PGM 220 69 3 7 2 Leading Digit Table PGM 221 70 3 7 3 Digit Modification Table PGM222 72 3 7 4 LCR Table Initialization PGM 223 73 3 8 Toll Table PGM 224 226 75 3 8 1 Toll Exception Table PGM 224 75 3 8 2 Canned Toll Tables PGM 225 77 3 8 3 Emergency Service Call PGM 226 78 3 9 Tables PGM 227 236 79 3 9 1 Authorization Code Table PGM 227
7. 79 2 5 6 Walking COS 79 2 6 Hunt Group 81 2 6 1 Terminal Group 83 2 6 2 Circular Group 83 2 6 3 Ring Group 84 2 6 4 Voice Mail Group 85 2 6 5 Unified Call Distribution UCD Group 85 2 6 6 Automatic Call Distribution ACD 86 2 7 Conference 88 2 7 1 Conference SLT Broker Call 89 2 7 2 Paging
8. 2 2 1 2 Preferred Line Answer PLA 4 2 1 3 Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 2 1 4 Customer Call Routing CCR with VMIB 5 2 1 5 CO Line Name 7 2 1 6 Universal Night Answer UNA 7 2 2 Outgoing Call Access 9 2 2 1 Basic Access 9 2 2 2 Call Time Restriction 11 2 2 3 CO Line Queuing 11 2 2 4 CO Step Call Analog Only 12 2 2 5 Emergency Call Service
9. 19 3 1 13 SMDR Account Group PGM 124 19 3 1 14 Copy DSS Button PGM 125 20 3 1 15 Station IP List PGM 126 20 3 1 16 Display Station Number PGM 130 131 21 3 2 CO Line PGM 140 146 22 3 2 1 CO Service Type PGM 140 22 3 2 2 CO Line Attributes I PGM 141 23 3 2 3 CO Line Attributes II PGM 142 24 3 2 4 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 27 3 2 5 CO Line Assignment Display PGM 145 28 3 2 6 CO to CID Attributes PGM 147 29 3 3 System Data PGM 160 185
10. 40 2 4 1 Absent Text Message 40 2 4 2 Alarm 42 2 4 3 Automatic Privacy 43 2 4 4 Background Music BGM 44 2 4 5 Camp On 45 2 4 6 Change Ring Type 46 2 4 7 Dialing Security 47 2 4 8 Do Not Disturb DND 47 2 4 9 One Time Do Not Disturb DND 48 2 4 10 Flash 48 2 4 11 Flexible Buttons
11. 79 3 9 2 Custom Call Routing PGM 228 80 3 9 3 Executive Secretary Table PGM 229 81 3 9 4 System Speed Zone PGM 232 82 3 9 5 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 83 3 9 6 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 84 3 10 Other Tables 85 3 10 1 Nation Specific PGM 400 423 85 3 10 2 Initialization PGM 450 88 3 10 3 Print Port Database PGM 451 89 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 1 1 IIN NTTRROODDU UCCTTIIOON N This Programming Manual is designed to provide general system information related to ADMIN Programming using a DKTU and PC for the ARIA SOHO This manual contains the followin
12. 98 2 10 2 Door Phone 99 2 10 3 Loud Bell LBC 100 2 11 Voice Service 101 2 11 1 Recording system VMIB Announcement 101 2 11 2 Remote Control 103 2 11 3 Two Way Recording 105 2 11 4 Recording User VMIB Announcement 107 2 11 5 VMIB Announcement for Auto Attendant 109 2 11 6 VMIB Message Transfer 110 2 11 7 VMIB Message with CLI 110 2 12 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 111 2 12 1 Lost Call P
13. 69 2 4 32 In Room Indication 70 2 4 33 Chime Bell 71 2 4 34 Emergency Intrusion 72 2 4 35 Forced Trunk Disconnect 72 2 4 36 Barge In 73 2 5 Call Barring 74 2 5 1 Account Code 74 2 5 2 Authorization Code 75 2 5 3 Automatic Call Release 76 2 5 4 Class of Service COS 76 2 5 5 System Speed Zone
14. ARIA SOHO Feature Description and Operation Manual ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Copyright Information Copyright 2006 LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved This material is copyrighted by LG Nortel Co Ltd LGN Any unauthorized reproductions use or disclosure of this material or any part thereof is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws LGN reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice The information furnished by LGN in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable but is not warranted to be true in all cases LGN and ARIA SOHO are trademarks of LG Nortel Co Ltd All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Revision History ISSUE DATE CONTENTS OF CHANGES REMARK ISSUE 0 2 2006 06 DRAFT Update ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Table of Contents 1 1 Manual Usage 1 2 1 Incoming Call Pickup 2 2 1 1 Ring Assignment
15. ON Conference Room is activated but no members are joined OFF Conference Room is deactivated LED Flash 60 ipm Members have joined the Conference Room When using an Analog line set to a valid Open Loop timer PGM 142 FLEX13 a DISA and transferred CO call can join a conference room call 91 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 8 Paging Feature 2 8 1 Internal External All Call and Meet Me Page Description Stations can individually be allowed or denied access to make pages this applies to all Internal and External Page Zones A Station denied access to paging ma still answer a Meet Me Page announcement External Paging One zone is available and requires an externally provided amplifier and paging system External Paging can have a relay contact associated with it Internal Paging Ten zones are available A Station can be in any or all zones or in no zone at all Stations must be assigned to a group to receive Pages Stations not assigned to a page group can still make page announcements if allowed in Station programming Stations assigned to a particular Group will receive Pages for that group A warning tone if assigned will be given to the Page Zone prior to the audio connection The User is allowed to continue the Page for a specified period after the timer expires the User will be disconnected and the Page Zone will be returned to idle A
16. Determines if dialed digit COS Station matches with the appropriate toll pass digits Canned Toll Table 1 Allow Table 01 20 225 2 Deny Table 01 20 Max 14 digits Determines if dialed digit COS Station matches with the appropriate toll pass digits 226 Emergency Service Call 01 10 Max 14 Digits Up to 10 emergency codes can be programmed ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 30 OTHER TABLES PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Authorization Code Table Not Assigned Contains Station passwords and extra account codes CO Line Groups can be marked to deny access unless appropriate authorization code entry 227 Table Entry 001 200 3 11 digits CCR Table 1 70 1 Station STA 2 Hunt Group HUNT 3 VMIB Announce 4 VMIB Drop Announce 5 System Speed 2000 2499 6 Internal Page 1 10 7 External Page 1 8 All Call Page 1 2 228 10 Conference Room 1 9 Designates ring destination for incoming calls 229 Executive Secretar y Table Entry 1 6 STA STA Designates ring destination when Executive Station is in DND state System Speed Zone 01 10 1 Speed Bin Range in Zone 2200 2499 Max 10 System Speed Zones Admin PGM232 FLEX2 2 Station Range STA No 10 57 Designates System Speed Zones assigned to a Station 3 Toll Checking ON OFF ON Toll Check Admin PGM232 FLEX4 232 4 Authorizatio
17. FLEX24 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 12 3 1 4 Station Attributes III PGM113 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 113 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number or Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM113 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS ADMIN DKTU Only If this value is set to ON the assigned Station Users can program the ADMIN Database FLEX1 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES Default ON for Attendant Station 0 OFF 1 ON VMIB Access If this value is set to ON the Station User can use VMIB FLEX2 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Group Listening If this value is set to ON the Station User can use group listening while on a handset call by pressing the MON button other people in the vicinity will be able to hear the conversation through the speaker NOTE Only the voice of the User on the Handset will project their voice to the User on the other end of the call FLEX3 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Override Privilege If this value is set to ON the Station User can override a CO call FLEX4 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON SMDR Hidden Dialed Digits If this value is set to ON the dialed number of a CO call will appear on the
18. Transferred calls to a Hunt Group are not recalled When a call is received in a Hunt Group the call will be in the ring process before receiving the VMIB announcement for the duration of the Hunt Group Announcement timer If no Hunt Group announcement is assigned the timer is ignored If the timer is set to 0 the call will receive the announcement prior to the ring process When a Hunt Group has guaranteed announcement the first announcement timer is set to 0 the overflow timer is started and ringing is provided after the announcement finishes playing only the first announcement can be used for guaranteed announcement If all Stations in a Group are busy when a call is received the call continues to wait for an available Station in the Group If queued the call will be sent to MOH until the call is answered or disconnected If there is no available member in a Group because every member sets DND UCD DND or Call Forward all new calls to the Group and all queued calls in the Group are routed to another destination as programmed overflow destination or alternative destination in the case of a UCD group If a call is not answered when the Overflow timer expires it will be sent to the overflow destination while the VMIB announcement is being played If the overflow destination is not assigned the call will be dropped when the overflow timer expires If an announcement timer is set and no VMIB number is assigned the announce
19. Hunt Group features include VMIB Announcement ARIA SOHO System supports first and secondary VMIB announcements for the Hunt Group When a call is received at the Hunt Group the pre assigned VMIB announcement will be played to the caller if the VMIB announcement is set and the timer expires If the call is not answered when the second announcement expires this announcement will be played Also the secondary announcement can be repeated as its programming refer to Ref A Overflow Destination If the overflow timer expires and the call is unanswered the call will be diverted to the overflow destination The overflow destination can be an extension a Group VMIB announcement or a System Speed Dial bin number Wrap Up Timer When a member of the Hunt Group goes idle the ARIA SOHO System will not distribute calls to that member After the Wrap Up timer expires the member Station returns to a real idle state and ready to receive CO calls Music Source The ARIA SOHO System supports up to 8 kinds of music sources for Hunt Groups not including the ring back tone When a call goes to queue a caller will hear the pre assigned music source refer to Ref B Multiple Member Assignment A Station can be a member of one or more Hunt Groups of the same type 81 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition A Station in the DND Call Forward state will no receive Group calls
20. The default value for DSS DLS is as shown in the Table MAP 1 FLEX1 Intrusion FLEX2 All Call Page FLEX3 Call Park 01 FLEX4 Station Group 1 FLEX5 Camp On FLEX6 Internal All Call Page FLEX7 Call Park 02 FLEX8 Station Group 2 FLEX9 Group Call Pick up FLEX10 External All Call Page FLEX11 Call Park 03 FLEX12 Station Group 3 Station 100 135 MAP 2 136 151 MAP 3 Empty Admin Programming Station ID Assignment PGM 110 FLEX1 DSS DLS ID Assignment PGM 110 FLEX2 123 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 14 Traffic Analysis Description The System can monitor and print various System activities at the request of the Main Attendant refer to Ref A The information can be used to Monitor and evaluate System performance Observe current usage and take corrective actions if needed Anticipate possible CO line problems Determine System updates and upgrades The traffic data is output to the RS 232C or LAN The following traffic reports are supported Attendant Traffic Report Call Summary Report Call Hourly Report H W Unit Usage Summary Report CO Line Traffic Summary Report CO Line Hourly Report Operation The Traffic Analysis is only available from the Main Attendant Station refer to Admin Programming Menu in the Admin Programming Manual The measurement time type can be one of Today s
21. Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 FLEX6 2 3 2 2 Call Transfer to Station A call can be transferred to another Station within the System The transfer can be screened announced or unscreened to an idle busy Station or Hunt Group The transferred call will ring and provides and Exclusive Hold flashing indication to the receiving party s DKTU If the receiving Station does not answer the call in the Transfer Recall time the transferring Station and the transferred station will receive the recall If the call still remains unanswered the Attendant will also receive a recall for the duration of the Attendant Recall timer After that the transferred call will be disconnected Operation To transfer to an idle Station unscreened perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 The intercom dial tone should be heard and the active call will be placed on exclusive hold 3 Dial the Station number that will receive the transferring call 4 Go on hook by replacing the handset To transfer to an idle Station screened perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 The intercom dial tone should be heard and the active call will be placed on exclusive hold 3 Dial the Station number that will receive the transferring call 4 When the called Station answers announce the call being transferred and then connect the call by going on hook and replacing the handset To transfer
22. 0 2sec OFF 0 4sec ON 4sec OFF If set to YES ring cadences will be switched 9 ACD Print Enable ON OFF OFF Determines if ACD Print is available 10 ACD Print Timer 001 255 3 digits 001 Determines if ACD Database is printed every 10sec or 1hr Admin 161 FLEX14 11 ACD Clear Database After Print ON OFF OFF Determines if ACD Database is initialized after printing 12 VMIB Prompt Gain 00 31 08 Value is applied when VMIB Announcement is played 13 CLI Information of VM SMDI ON OFF OFF Determines if CLI Information is included on Voice Mail printed by SMDI through RS232 14 ACD Print Timer Unit HOUR SECOND SECOND Determines the unit of the ACD Printer every 10sec or 1hr Admin 161 FLEX10 15 Set VM SMDI Type TYPE II TYPE I TYPE I Determines VM SMDI Type 16 Incoming Toll Check ON OFF OFF Determines if System checks toll of incoming calls 161 17 Auto FAX Transfer CO 1 8 Determines which CO Line will be used for automatic FAX Transfer ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 18 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 18 DSS Indication ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Determines if LED indication will be blocked for incoming calls NOTE does not apply to DID DISA Calls 19 UK Billing Mode ON OFF OFF Determines if UK billing Mode is used 20 COS 7 When Authorization Fails ON OFF OFF Determines if COS will automatically be
23. 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Press the button To delete a saved number perform the following 1 Press the SPEED button twice after accessing the CO Line and dialing 2 Pause the save number redial bin will be erased Condition When the used CO Line is busy an idle CO Line in the group is accessed and the saved number is dialed The stored number is not deleted when the System power is OFF 19 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 2 8 4 Station Speed Dialing Description A DKTU User can store up to 100 frequently used Station numbers to Station Speed Bin 000 099 Station numbers consisting of up to 24 digits including pauses Flash commands pulse to tone switchover and no display characters pause is automatically inserted after a flash Operation To make a call using Station Speed Dial from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial bin 000 099 To store Station Speed Dial numbers from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial bin 000 099 4 If desired press the CO Line or Group button 5 Dial the desired telephone number including these special codes CALLBK Insert Pause key If stored as the first digit its fu
24. Condition If the DKTU is changed to Hands Free mode the connection tone will be provided and the voice path is connected If the called party DKTU is set to linked pair Station the answer mode of the called party will no be changed If the calling party DKTU is set to a linked pair Station the calling party DKTU can use the forced hands free mode Admin Programming Forced Hands Free Mode PGM 111 FLEX19 2 4 29 Hot Desk Description A Hot Desk enabled the User to dynamically select a Station using a login logout operation without having a fixed Station For example in a call center or marketing department people can share work stations with one another Operation To activate Hot Desk operation at a dummy station perform the following Steps 1 User goes Off Hook or presses the MON button 2 Dial the authorization code then press the key if the authorization code is more than 5 digits the key is not needed 3 Dial the User authorization code 4 The Station restores the User database Station number COS Ring Assign etc and can receive incoming calls To logout a User perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial the User logout code or press the programmed Agent Logout flexible button 3 User can select the call forward type refer to values using the volume up and down keys Off Net Speed 000 Mobile Extension VMIB VM Group 4 Press the
25. FLEX2 FLEX1 FLEX1 FLEX4 refer to Table FLEX2 FLEX1 FLEX2 refer to Table HOLD SAVE CO TYPE TABLE FLEX TYPE FLEX2 DEFAULT SUB ATTR REMARK 1 Normal CO DISA Attributes FLEX1 Day FLEX2 Night FLEX3 Weekend FLEX4 On Demand For each Item FLEX1 DISA Service ON OFF FLEX2 VMIB MSG 00 70 00 not assigned ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 23 3 2 2 CO Line Attributes I PGM 141 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 141 3 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 140 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS CO Line Group Each CO Line must be a member of a CO Line Group Groups may be assigned according to the CO type and COS FLEX1 02 CO Line Group HOLD SAVE VALUES Group 00 private group Group 09 not used group CO COS COS is assigned to each CO Line FLEX2 2 CO COS HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 No Restriction 2 Exception Table A Governs 3 Exception Table B Governs 4 Restricts Long Distance Code 5 Overrides Station COS 2 3 4 and 5 6 DISA Account Code If this value is set to ON when the incoming CO caller tries to access another CO Line by dialing a CO Line access code the caller will be prompted to enter an authorization code FLEX3 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0
26. HOLD SAVE DISA No Answer Timer Used for DISA call routing If the Station doesn t answer a DISA call within the time allowed the call will be routed to the assigned Admin PGM 167 FLEX3 value FLEX2 Seconds 2 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE VMIB User Record Timer Designates the maximum time a Station User can record their VMIB announcement FLEX3 Seconds 3 digits Range 010 255 HOLD SAVE VMIB Valid User Message Timer If this value is set to 0 the VMIB announcement can not be recorded designates the minimum time that a Station User must record their VMIB announcement FLEX4 Seconds 1 digit Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Door Open Time Designates the length of time needed to execute the door open relay FLEX5 VALUE 100 m sec 2 digits Range 05 99 HOLD SAVE ICM Box Timer Designates the ringing time of the ICM box at a Station when the ICM box User presses the CALL button FLEX6 Seconds 2 digits Range 00 60 HOLD SAVE ICM Dial Tone Timer Designates the amount of time when an off hook Station will play the intercom dial tone before an error tone is provided FLEX7 Seconds 2 digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE Inter digit Timer Designates the maximum time between digits before an error tone is provided FLEX8 Seconds 2 digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE MSG Wait Reminder Tone Timer Designates the amount of time between rep
27. HOLD SAVE Remote Diagnostic Remote Diagnostic data can be printed through this port FLEX12 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE Not Supported ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 47 3 3 17 Pulse Dial Ratio PGM 176 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 176 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 176 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Pulse Dial Ratio In ARIA SOHO pulse dial speed ratio is set only for 10 PPS FLEX1 0 Refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 10 PPS 60 40 1 10 PPS 66 33 2 10 PPS 50 50 not available in ARIA SOHO 3 3 18 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Attributes PGM 177 SMDR will provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 177 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 177 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS SMDR Save Enable If this value is set to ON a maximum of 1000 SMDR data can be recorded in the System memory FLEX1 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON SMDR Print Enable If this value is set to ON SMDR data can be printed in real time through the serial Modem LAN port FLEX2 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Long Distance All Call Record SMDR Recor
28. OFF 1 ON CO Line Assign If this value is set to ON Polarity Reverse is applied to the CO Line otherwise Loop Start is applied FLEX4 1 Pol HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 Loop Start Loop 1 Polarity Reverse Pol CO Line Type Designates the CO Line Type FLEX5 1 PBX HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 CO 1 PBX CO Line Signal Type Designates the CO Line signaling type FLEX6 0 Pulse HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 Pulse 1 DTMF Flash Type Analog CO Lines only Designates the type of Flash that is used FLEX7 1 Ground HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 Pulse 1 Ground ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 24 PGM 140 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Universal Night Answer UNA If this value is set to ON UNA is applied to the active CO Line FLEX8 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON CO Line Group Account If this value is set to ON the CO Line user will be prompted to enter an authorization code to access this CO Line FLEX9 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Tenancy Group Designates the ICM Tenancy group number a Station belongs to If this value is set separated Day Night ring mode is applied to incoming CO Calls according to the ICM Tenancy group Attendant Day Night ring mode FLEX10 1 Tenancy Group HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 5 ARIA SOHO 3 2 3 CO Line Attributes II PGM 142 In this p
29. STATION COS 9 Table D Table D Unrestricted Canned Restricted1 Unrestricted Canned Restricted1 Long distance calls not allowed 8 digits maximum Canned Restricted2 Long distance calls not allowed longer than 8 digits STATION COS COS 1 There is no restriction to dial COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B COS 4 Monitored by Exception Tables A amp B COS 5 Long Distance calls not allowed longer than 8 digits COS 6 Long distance calls not allowed max 8 digits may be dialed COS 7 Only Intercom paging emergency calls allowed no dialing allowed on CO Lines COS 8 Monitored by Exception Table C COS 9 Monitored by Exception Table D 77 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 CO COS COS 1 There is no restriction to dial monitored by Station COS COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A amp Station COS COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B amp Station COS COS 4 Long Distance calls not allowed for all Station COS max 8 digits may be dialed COS 5 Overrides Station COS 2 3 4 5 6 no COS restriction CO TO CO LINE COS COS 1 There is no restriction to dial COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B COS 4 Monitored by Exception Tables A amp B COS 5 Long Distance calls not allowed longer than 8 digits COS 6 Long distance call
30. 02 12 KHz not available in ARIA SOHO 03 16 KHz not available in ARIA SOHO 04 Singular Polarity Reverse SPR 05 Plural Polarity Reverse PPR 06 No Polarity Reverse NPR Line Drop using CPT Call Progress Tone If this value is set to ON CPT checks the incoming CO Line when answered and if CPT detects a dial tone the System should drop the line for toll restriction FLEX4 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON CO Distinct Ring If this value is set to 0 the designated ring tone is heard at the Station when it receives an incoming CO Call so that the user can distinguish incoming CO Calls and ICM Calls with the different ring tones FLEX5 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 4 ADMIN 422 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 26 PGM 142 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS CO Line MOH Designates MOH on the CO Line refer to VALUES FLEX6 02 External Music HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 Not Assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 VMIB MOH 4 8 SLT MOH 9 Hold Tone PABX CO Dial Tone If this value is set to YES PBX or PABX provides the CO Dial Tone otherwise the LDK System provides it FLEX7 0 NO HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 NO System 1 YES PBX PABX CO Ring Back Tone If this value is set to YES PBX or PABX provides a CO Ring Back Tone otherwise the LDK system provides it FLEX8 1 YES HOL
31. 2 15 Software Upgrade Description The ARIA SOHO MBU software can be upgraded by ARIA SOHO upgrade program in PC In order to upgrade by ARIA SOHO upgrade program PC and ARIA SOHO system should be connected through SERIAL USB LAN MODEM interface Then the software file in the PC is sent to the system at first and the MBU software is upgraded PSTN LAN USB RS 232C Serial Modem FIGURE 2 15 AVAILABLE CONNECTIONS FOR SOFTWARE UPGRADE The figure 2 15 1 describes that there are 4 types of the connection of ARIA SOHO system and PC for ARIA SOHO MBU software SERIAL USB LAN MODEM 129 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 15 1 USB Description The ARIA SOHO MBU software can be upgraded through USB interface by ARIA SOHO upgrade program in PC Operation To conduct a software upgrade perform the following Steps 1 Connect the USB cable to the PC USB port 2 Run LDK PC Upgrade program 3 Select the ARIA SOHO system to be upgraded and press OK button Click on the OK button 4 Set the port type to USB Connection And press the Select button 130 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 5 Enter path of the binary file and the password for upgrade And press the Next button 6 In the Next window press Start button You can see the ARIA SOHO
32. Allow Table D is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS9 FLEX7 VALUE refer to Allow Table Range 01 30 Allow Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Deny Table D Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS9 Station match with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Deny Table D is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS9 FLEX8 VALUE refer to Deny Table Range 01 30 Deny Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 77 ALLOW DENY TABLE RULE ENTRY CONDITIONS amp RESULTS ALLOW DENY ALLOW TABLE DENY TABLE 1 Not Exist Not Exist No Restriction No Restriction 2 Exist Not Exist Found allowed Not Found denied 3 Not Exist Exist Found allowed Not Found denied 4 Exist Exist Found allowed Not Found check Deny Table Found denied Not Found allowed 3 8 2 Canned Toll Tables PGM 225 In addition to the basic toll restrictions Stations within COS5 or 6 are subject to dial restrictions based on the Canned Allow and Deny Tables This program permits entries in the Canned toll tables Both the Allow and Deny tables have 20 bins of up to 14 digits In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 225 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 225 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE C
33. CO Line Name Display PGM 142 FLEX1 CO Line Name Assignment PGM 142 FLEX2 2 1 6 Universal Night Answer UNA If the CO Line is programmed for UNA any User can pick up incoming CO calls during Night mode by dialing the Night Answer code 569 refer to Ref A regardless of the pick up group If there s incoming CO calls during Night mode refer to Ref B Station B can pick up the call even though Station A and B do not belong to a pick up group Operation To pick up a call in Night mode perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 The intercom dial tone should be heard 3 Dial 569 or the Universal Night Answer code 4 The call is connected Condition UNA feature is activated when the Ring mode is Night If Nation is set to Korea UNA code is applied in Day mode If there isn t an incoming CO call when the Night Answer code is dialed from a Station an error tone will be heard The connected CO Line may be transferred or disconnected similar to Day mode call handling If External Night Ringing is set to ON the call is routed to External Page refer to Ref C by LBC1 refer to Ref D 7 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Reference A Night Answer Code 2 1 6 B Ring Mode 2 13 8 C Internal External All Call and Meet Me Page 2 8 1 D Loud Bell LBC 2 10 3 Admin Programming Unive
34. FLEX17 VMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX2 VMIB Message Retrieve Password PGM 113 FLEX8 VMIB Message Retrieve Date Tome PGM 113 FLEX9 VMIB Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 FLEX1 VMIB User Record Timer PGM 181 FLEX3 VMIB Valid User Message Timer PGM 181 FLEX4 VMIB Rewind Message Timer PGM 181 FLEX17 2 11 5 VMIB Announcement for Auto Attendant Description Incoming CO calls may be answered by VMIB and rerouted to another Station with CCR when the Attendant does not answer the call before the No Answer timer expires or the Attendant is busy Operation When an incoming call is received at the Attendant Station with the Auto Attendant feature enabled and there is no answer the following will occur 1 On No Answer the No Answer timer is initiated 2 When timer expires the call is forwarded to the Auto Attendant the caller will hear a VMIB message and will be able to reroute to another User using CCR Condition No available for recall and transferred calls CO ringing should be assigned to only the Attendant Admin Programming Auto Attendant VMIB Announce Number PGM 165 109 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 11 6 VMIB Message Transfer Description Messages received at a Station may be transferred to another Station Operation To transfer a message to another Station perform the following Steps 1 Whi
35. ON No Answer Prompt Usage If this value is set to ON the No Answer Announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to the No Answer Destination FLEX4 FLEX4 refer to VMIB Prompt Values 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Attendant Transfer Prompt Usage If this value is set to ON the Attendant Transfer Announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to the Attendant FLEX4 FLEX5 refer to VMIB Prompt Values 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Reroute Busy Destination When a DISA caller is rerouted by the No Answer Forward CCR and if the rerouted destination is busy calls will follow the Reroute Busy Destination FLEX5 FLEX1 Range refer to VALUES 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant ring assignment FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 39 PGM 167 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Reroute Error Destination When a DISA caller is rerouted by the No Answer Forward CCR and if the rerouted destination returns an error calls will follow the Reroute Error Destination FLEX6 FLEX1 Range refer to VALUES 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant ring assignment FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group 0 OFF 1 ON Reroute No Answer Destination When a DISA caller i
36. Range 00 30 HOLD SAVE FAX Tone Detect Timer Designates the amount of time allowed to detect a FAX tone from the FAX CO line before the call is routed to the ring assigned Station for FAX CO line FLEX13 Seconds 2 digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE FAX CO Call Timer Designates the amount of time allowed to connect a call when a FAX tone is detected from the FAX CO line the call will attempt to be routed to the appropriate FAX Station FLEX14 Seconds 1 digit Range 1 5 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 56 3 4 4 IN ROOM INDICATION PGM 183 A supervisor press In Room Indication button and HOLD SAVE button at idle state Then each LED of In Room Indication buttons of every members turned ON 10 bins can be programmed Each bins have at most 20 members excluding Supervisor In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 183 3 Enter bin number 01 10 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 183 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS In Room Indication Supervisor This station can Turn ON or OFF In Room Indication button of every member in the same bin FLEX1 Station Number HOLD SAVE In Room Indication Member Each Member can see the status of In Room Indication button according to the supervisor FLEX2 Station Range HOLD SAVE 3 4 5 CHIME BELL PG
37. SAF Only Short ACO Gain 1 Short SLIB 00 63 37 2 Long SLIB Gain 00 63 46 415 3 Far SLIB 00 63 50 SAF Only Long ACO Gain 1 Short SLIB 00 63 39 2 Long SLIB 00 63 45 416 3 Far SLIB 00 63 51 SAF Only System Tone Frequency 1 Dial Tone 0425 0000 2 Ring Back Tone RBT 0425 0000 3 Busy Tone 0425 0000 4 Error Tone 0620 0000 420 5 Dummy Dial Tone 4 digits 0350 4400 Nation Specific Differential Ring Frequency 1 Ring 1 1000 1020 2 Ring 2 0890 0910 3 Ring 3 1260 1280 421 4 Ring 4 4 Digits 0800 0820 Nation Specific Distinct Ring Frequency 1 Ring 1 4 Digits 0480 0000 Nation Specific 2 Ring 2 0400 0000 3 Ring 3 0620 0000 422 4 Ring 4 0770 0000 423 ANCR Tone Cadence ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 33 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Ring Back Tone RBT ON 050 OFF 100 2 Busy tone ON 020 OFF 025 3 Error Tone ON 012 OFF 012 4 S Dial Tone 000 255 ON 070 OFF 000 20Msec Base INITIALIZATION PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Initialization 1 Flexible Numbering Plan Initialization PGM105 107 2 Station Database Initialization PGM110 114 116 119 121 124 179 3 CO Line Database PGM 140 144 4 System Feature Database Initialization PGM108 160 177 5 Station Group Database Initializatio
38. This feature enables Station Users to utilize the FLASH button for terminating pages and intercom calls While paging or on an intercom call press the FLASH button to terminate the call and return to the intercom dial tone Operation To perform a Flash while on a CO Line call perform the following Steps 1 Press the FLASH button To generate a flash from a SLT while on a CO Line call perform the following 1 Press the hook switch slightly 2 Dial 551 refer to Ref A 48 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition The Flash command is not activated on ISDN CO Lines A Station that isn t permitted to access CO Lines cannot initiate a Flash During a Flash the LED of the applicable CO Line will flash Admin Programming Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and installation Manual flash Command to CO Line Code PGM 106 FLEX11 Flash Type PGM 141 FLEX7 CO Flash timer PGM 142 FLEX12 SLT Hook Switch Bounce timer PGM 182 FLEX1 SLT Maximum Hook Switch Flash timer PGM 182 FLEX2 SLT minimum Hook Switch Flash timer PGM182 FLEX3 2 4 11 Flexible Buttons Description Flexible buttons are customized by Admin or Station Programming Buttons could be programmed with the following features CO Line Automatically accesses the assigned line User Programmable DSS BLF Automatically indicates the assigned Sta
39. Timer Designates the amount of time the System will wait for the Station User to press the REWIND button while listening to VMIB messages FLEX17 VALUE 2 digits Range 01 99 HOLD SAVE LCD Connect Timer If this timer expires after starting an outgoing call the System will regard that Line as connected if any digits are dialed after the timer expires the Pause is automatically added before the first added digit CIS Only FLEX18 Seconds 2 digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE LCO CPT Detect Timer To check LCO status after LCO is connected the System assigns CPT periodically with this timer To activate CO CO Transfer CPT Detect should be set to ON FLEX19 Seconds 2 digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 55 3 4 3 System Timers II PGM 182 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 182 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 182 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS SLT Hook Switch Bounce timer SLT Only Designates the length of time needed to detect a valid on or off hook state FLEX1 VALUE 100 m sec 2 digits Range 01 25 HOLD SAVE SLT Maximum Hook Flash Timer SLT Only Designates how long the user needs to press the hook switch to register a FLASH Time Break Recall FLEX2 VALUE 10 m sec 3 digits Range 00
40. To cancel recording perform the following 1 While recording a call press the RECORD button again OR 2 Hang up to cancel recording 106 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition While the recording feature is enabled the RECORD button will flash at 240ipm and if it is disabled the RECORD button will be extinguished Not available on SLT Recording operation is cancelled when the Station returns on hook presses the RECORD button again presses the FLASH button or the CO party hangs up This feature is available on SMDI mode only not DTMF mode Not available to Intercom call recording If Pole 3 of the DIP SW1 of the MBU is set to OFF down position and the System has an external voice mail system the conversation will be recorded on the external voice mail system Admin Programming Two Way Recording PGM 112 FLEX10 2 11 4 Recording User VMIB Announcement Description If the access to the VMIB is allowed the User can record User greetings and make calls to be forwarded to the VMIB port according to the Forward condition type if User enables forward The Caller can leave a voice mail message wait at the Station after hearing the User greeting Operation To record a User greeting at the Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 61 3 Dial the message number the announcement Press t
41. do not assign a CO ring to the FAX Station If a CO Line is programmed for DISA and for Automatic FAX Transfer the incoming calls from that CO Line are served as DISA calls if a User wants to call the FAX Station just call Station 106 by exploiting DISA call When the FAX machine goes idle after a FAX call the associated CO Line is released If the FAX CO Line is disconnected during a FAX call the CO Line will be released and the FAX machine will return to an idle state Only Analog lines are enabled for using this feature Admin Programming Auto FAX Transfer CO PGM 161 FLEX17 FAX Tone Detect Timer PGM 182 FLEX13 FAX CO Call Timer PGM182 FLEX14 65 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 27 Extend CO to CO Connection Description When a call is made between two Analog CO Lines using DISA or Off Net Call Forward the cal duration is limited by the unsupervised conference timer After the unsupervised conference timer expired the call will be dropped by the ARIA SOHO System This feature is enabled to extend unsupervised conference timer for as long as the caller wants If this feature is activated the DTMF receiver device is assigned to caller side CO Lines Operation When the CO to CO Unsupervised Conference Extend timer feature is activated two Analog CO Lines on a conversation will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires and the cal
42. the LED DSS button at the Attendant Station will flash A SLT User in the screened transfer mode can activate broker call with the hook flash and then converse with both the transferred Station and the CO Line call A call cannot be transferred to another busy SLT from a SLT when receiving a busy tone a SLT user can be connected to the CO Line with a hook flash If a transfer is made while dialing on a CO Line exists the dialing will not be transmitted Admin Programming Transfer Recall timer PGM 180 FLEX7 I Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX5 Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX1 No Touch Answer PGM 111 FLEX7 2 3 3 Holding and Parking 2 3 3 1 Hold Description A Station User can place a call on hold The following two types of hold are available depending on the desired result and Admin Programming System Hold Any Station can retrieve this type of held call another Station in the Group can seize the CO Line to answer Exclusive Hold Only the Station that placed the call on hold can retrieve it another Station in the Group cannot seize the CO Line while the call is being held at the originating Station Operation To place a CO Line on Exclusive System Hold from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 While on a call press the HOLD SAVE button once System Hold or twice Exclusive Hold depending on Hold Preference setup refer to Ref A To place a CO Line on Exclusive System H
43. 1 Authorization Code Table PGM 227 The authorization code table entries consist of each Station password and extra account codes The table entry from 001 to the maximum capacity of Station numbers are saved along with the password of each Station CO Line Groups can be marked to deny access until a matched authorization code is entered In this case a DND warning tone is provided when the CO Line Group access code is dialed In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 227 3 Enter the appropriate Bin number Range 001 200 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 227 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Authorization Code Table If the dialed Authorization code is verified a CO dial tone will be presented Otherwise an error tone will be heard and access to the group will be denied Stations or Admin programming can enter authorization codes The Administrator can see and change Station passwords no duplicate entries In the ARIA SOHO System the total number of allowed authorization codes is 200 FLEX1 Authorization Code 3 11 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default Not Assigned Day COS of Authorization Code Day COS of Stations can only be viewed COS for extra entries can also be assigned FLEX2 Class of Service Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE Night COS of Authorization Code Night COS of Stations can only
44. 100 151 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default Modem Station is the last one assigned STA 151 CO No If a CO Line is associated with the Modem all incoming CO calls through the line will be connected via the Modem The Modem associated CO Line cannot be used for outgoing CO calls FLEX2 CO Number Range 01 12 HOLD SAVE 3 3 12 Music Assignment PGM 171 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 171 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 171 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS BGM Type Determines the Background music type FLEX1 BGM Type refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 NOT ASSIGNED 1 INT MUSIC 2 EXT MUSIC 3 RESERVED 4 8 SLT MOH MOH Type When MOH Type is assigned the external party of a CO Line call placed in a hold state System Exclusive Transfer Conference etc should hear music in the interim FLEX2 MOH Type refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 NOT ASSIGNED 1 INT MUSIC 2 EXT MUSIC 3 RESERVED 4 8 SLT MOH 9 HOLD TONE ICM Box Music Channel Determines if the playback of the ICM Box Music Channel FLEX3 Music Channel refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 NOT ASSIGNED 1 INT MUSIC 2 EXT MUSIC 3 RESERVED 4 8 SLT MOH ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 42 PGM 171 DESCRIPTION PRO
45. 2 13 4 Attendant Intrusion Description In the event of an emergency the Attendant can intrude on a conversation in progress between a Station and a CO Line party Figure 2 13 4 illustrates Attendant Intrusion conversation attendant CO intrusion attendant conversation CO conversion conversion FIGURE 2 13 4 ATTENDANT INTRUSION Operation To intrude on a Station CO Line conversation from the Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 When attempting to call a busy Station the Attendant can press the programmed ATD INTRUSION flexible button 2 After hearing the intrusion tone the Attendant should be connected to the call in progress To assign a flexible button as Attendant Intrusion perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 86 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition In order to use this feature Auto Privacy should be OFF PGM 161 and the Attendant s Override Privilege PGM 113 FLEX4 should be Enabled Admin Programming Auto Privacy PGM 161 Privacy Warning Tone PGM 161 Override Privilege PGM 113 117 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 13 5 Attendant Override Description When this feature is Enabled the Attendant can temporarily override a DND state on any Station calls can be transf
46. 2006 2 4 13 Intercom Signal Mode Description Users can control the method by which they receive intercom calls and signals Stations equipped with a Speakerphone can select one of the available 3 signaling modes HF Hands Free The Station User upon hearing a tone burst and voice announcement over the speaker can reply hands free TN Tone A Standard ring tone notifies the party of an incoming intercom call The called party answers by lifting the handset or pressing the MON button PV Privacy The Station User receives a tone burst and a voice announcement over the speaker The microphone is deactivated for privacy The called party must lift the handset or press the MUTE button to answer the call Operation To assign the Intercom signal mode perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 12 the confirmation tone should be heard 3 Dial the Signal Mode type 1 HF 2 TN 3 PV 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button and confirmation tone is heard Condition In Message Wait ICM Queuing Call Transfer Attendant Override the ring is received with TN mode regardless of the assigned Intercom Signal mode refer to Ref A Ref B Ref C Intercom Signal mode will not affect the voice announcements from internal all call paging refer to Ref D Reference A Message Wait 2 4 15 B Call Transfer 2 3 2 C Attendant Override 2 13 5 D Paging Feature 2 8 52 ARIA SO
47. 3 4 2 System Timers II PGM 181 53 3 4 3 System Timers II PGM 182 55 3 4 4 IN ROOM INDICATION PGM 183 56 3 4 5 CHIME BELL PGM 184 56 3 5 Station Group PGM 190 191 57 3 5 1 Station Group Assignment PGM 190 57 3 5 2 Station Group Attributes PGM 191 58 3 5 3 UCD Group Attribute 61 3 5 4 Ring Group Attributes 64 3 5 5 VM Group Attribute 66 3 5 6 Pick up Group Attribute 67 3 6 SMDR Local Code PGM 204
48. Active Mobile Extension Not Supported 41 Wake up Time Registration One time Continuous 42 Wake Up Time Cancel 43 Activate Conference Room 44 Deactivate Conference Room 51 Pre selected MSG Activation 52 Set Custom Message 61 Record VMIB User Greeting 62 Listen VMIB Time amp Date 63 Listen VMIB Station Number 64 Listen VMIB Station Status 65 Record VMIB Page Message 66 Erase VMIB User Greeting 67 Erase VMIB Page Message 71 LCD Display Mode English Domestic Language Keyset 72 MPB Version Display 73 Background Music 74 Station User Name Registration 75 Headset Speakerphone Mode Keyset 76 Headset Ring Mode Keyset 78 Serial No SW Packages Keyset with LCD 79 PC Phone Lock Key HOTDESK Logout ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 3 FUNCTION CODE ITEM REMARK 0 HOTDESK Login 1 Relocation OUT 2 Relocation IN 3 Register Bluetooth 4 Bluetooth Usage ATTENDANT PROGRAMMING FUNCTION CODE ITEM REMARK 0111 Print SMDR Station Base System Attendant 0112 Delete SMDR Station Base System Attendant 0113 Print SMDR Group Base System Attendant 0114 Delete SMDR Group Base System Attendant 0115 Display Call Charge System Attendant 0116 Abort Printing System Attendant 0117 Print Lost Call System Attendant 0118 Delete Lost Call System Attendant 0121 Print All Sum
49. Admin Programming Emergency Service Call PGM 226 12 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 2 6 Hot Line amp Warm Line Description A Station User can instantly make an outgoing call by lifting the handset or pressing the ICM button if the User has previously stored the destination The destination can be a CO Line or CO Line Group the function can be setup on a Flexible button or at another Station Hot Line can be activated immediately when the Station is in the off hook state Warm Line can be activated after the Warm Line Timer has expired If the User dials another number prior to the Warm Line Timer expiration the call will activate as a Normal call not as a Warm Line call Operation To activate a Hot Line perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset at a Station where Hot Line is assigned 2 The assigned Hot Line feature is immediately activated To activate Warm Line perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset at a Station where Warm Line is assigned 2 The assigned Warm Line feature is activated if no dialing has been done while the Warm Line Timer is running Condition A Station can be assigned Hot or Warm Line with Admin Programming Admin 113 FLEX7 If there is no Flexible button at the Station the number is operated as a Speed Dial number The set value of the Warm Line Timer should be less than that of the Dial T
50. B or dial tone The caller then is able to dial additional digits to access the desired destination on the System Operation To use DISA Line Assignment perform the following Steps 1 Select the DISA Line you wish to use 2 When the tone or announcement is heard dial the desired Station Hunt Group number 3 After a connection is made dial the CO Access Code ex 8801 to call again outside of the System by securing another CO line Condition Assign the VMIB announcement instead of the intercom dial tone on a DISA line If the DISA Authorization Code is enabled for a DISA line a DND warning tone or VMIB announcement is heard guiding the user to enter the DISA Authorization Code refer to Ref C the dial tone then should be heard Each DISA line may be assigned as full time DISA or Night Mode Only Night mode DISA operates as a normal CO Line during Day mode If the VMIB Announcement number is stored with the CO Line will be dropped after the VMIB Announcement is played If the DISA Authorization Code is disabled or matched with the System Authorization Code permissions will be determined by CO to CO COS and CO COS refer to Ref D 4 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 If the DISA Authorization Code is enabled the Authorization Code should be entered to access outgoing CO Lines If the Authorization Code is matched with the Authorization code of the S
51. CLI Message wait gt VM Group Message wait Pressing the CALLBK button at the calling Station before the User greeting is played the message wait only with Station number is saved at the Called Station When a User calls a Station which is forwarded to VMIB the User greeting will be heard and a beep tone Each Station may have up to 800 VMIB message waits If all the VMIB ports are busy the ring back tone will be provided instead of the User greeting and the VMIB Station Forward timer will be started to retry an answer A User can leave and receive message waiting using a SLT with a message wait lamp Individual User greetings and VMIB message wait are protected from System restart In retrieval of a left message wait the order of playing is customizable from Time Date and Message being played to Admin programmed Date Time and Message In retrieval of a left message wait the Message Wait Retrieve password would be used by Admin PGM 113 FLEX8 if set a User should enter the Station password authorize code to retrieve While retrieving messages the User can rewind messages as allowed by the Rewind Message timer PGM 181 FLEX17 108 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Reference A Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Message Wait Callback Return code PGM 106 FLEX17 Admin Programming VMIB Message Type PGM 111
52. Call the busy Station the User will hear a busy tone 2 Press the MONITOR button on the appropriate Soft Button 3 Press the JOIN button on the appropriate Soft Button 4 The User will be able to join the call in progress and those on the existing call will hear a brief warning tone 5 The User can exit the conversation by pressing the DROP button on the appropriate Soft Button and return to an idle state by hanging up the receiver Condition Can only be used on DKTU s with 3 Soft Buttons Available only when a call on the CO Line or Station is in Talk mode When an Emergency Supervisor calls an Executive Station the call will be connected to the Executive Attendant Station Admin Programming Barge In Mode PGM 113 FLEX13 73 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 5 Call Barring 2 5 1 Account Code Description An account code is used to identify outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes the account code is appended to the SMDR Call Record A company uses an account code for each User Station so that the company can identify and bill where applicable calls made from each Station An account code may use up to a maximum of 12 digits 0 11 Operation To assign an ACCOUNT CODE flexible button to access the Account Code feature perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3
53. Code SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 173 PLA Priority Setting ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 6 MAIN MENU PGM ITEM 174 RS 232C Port Setting 175 Print Port Selection 176 Pulse Dial Ratio 177 SMDR Attributes 178 System Date Time Setting 179 Linked Station Pairs Table 180 System Timers I 181 System Timers II SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 182 System Timers III STATION GROUP 190 Station Group Assign LOCAL CODE TABLE 204 SMDR Local Code Table 220 LCR Attributes 221 LCR Leading Digit Table 222 LCR Digit Modification Table 223 LCR Table Initialization 224 Toll Exception Table Allow A Entry no 01 30 Toll Exception Table Deny A Entry no 01 30 Toll Exception Table Allow B Entry no 01 30 Toll Exception Table Deny B Entry no 01 30 225 Canned Toll Table Allow Entry no 01 10 Canned Toll Table Deny Entry no 01 10 226 Emergency Code Table 227 Authorization Code Table 228 Customer Call Routing 229 Executive Secretary Table 232 System Speed Zone 233 Weekly Time Table 234 Voice Mail Dialing Table TABLES 400 DTIB Rx Gain Control 401 SLIB Rx Gain Control 404 ACOB Rx Gain Control 407 VMIB Rx Gain Control 408 DTMF Receiver Rx Gain Control 409 EXT Page Rx Gain Control 410 CPTU Rx Gain Control 411 Modem Rx Gain Control 412 Short SLIB Gain Control 413 Lo
54. Conference 90 2 7 3 Conference Room 90 2 8 Paging Feature 92 2 8 1 Internal External All Call and Meet Me Page 92 2 8 2 Pre Recorded Message 93 2 8 3 SOS Paging 94 2 9 Linked Stations 95 2 9 1 Executive Secretary 95 2 9 2 Linked Pair Station 96 2 10 External Device Control 98 2 10 1 Door Open
55. DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS System Attendant The System Attendant differs from the Main Attendant in regard to call handling and System Management priority The System Attendant has more priority over the Main Attendant s NOTE The first System Attendant can not be deleted FLEX1 Station Number HOLD SAVE VALUES Default Station 101 1 System Attendant Main Attendant Assignment Main Attendants generally serve as call handlers To delete a Main Attendant press the FLEX button and select the Attendant to delete press the SPEED button FLEX2 Station Number HOLD SAVE VALUES Default Not Assigned 1 4 Main Attendants 3 3 6 Auto Attendant VMIB Announcement PGM 165 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 165 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 165 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Auto Attendant Usage If this value is set to ON Auto Attendant is activated FLEX1 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON VMIB Announce This value is the number of VMIB announcements played when Auto Attendant is activated FLEX2 01 HOLD SAVE VALUES 00 70 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 37 3 3 7 CO to CO COS PGM 166 When an external user of a DID DISA TIE line tries to access another CO Line in the System CO to CO COS is applied
56. If this value is set to ON the Station will temporarily be changed to 7 when an invalid authorization code is entered at the Station COS can be recovered by activating COS RESTORE If not assigned the day amp night COS in PGM 116 will be changed to 7 when an invalid authorization code is entered at the Station NOTE To recover COS day amp night COS should be reassigned FLEX20 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON 5 Digit Authorization Code Usage If this value is set to ON Authorization code is 5 digits fixed length Otherwise the code is flexible 3 11 digits FLEX21 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON LCR Dial Tone Detect If this value is set to ON the System first will check if the CO provides a dial tone in case of Analog CO being secured for LCR dialing if not dial tone exists the call will be re routed to an alternate DMT Index If LCR type is set to M13 LCR dial tone detect will not be available FLEX22 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 35 3 3 3 ADMIN Password PGM 162 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 162 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 162 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS ADMIN Password An ADMIN Password can be assigned as a security measure for entering the ADMIN
57. Message number 001 070 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button To activate VMIB SOS Paging perform the following 1 Press the assigned VMIB SOS PAGING flexible button Condition VMIB SOS Paging can only be activated by pressing an assigned flexible button on an idle DKTU VMIB SOS Paging messages can be recorded at any Station Paging Zones include Internal External and All Call Paging areas VMIB SOS Paging is not restricted by the VMIB Paging Timer 94 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 9 Linked Stations 2 9 1 Executive Secretary Description Stations in the System can be assigned as Executive and Secretary Pairs When an Executive Station is busy or in DND mode refer to Ref A intercom calls and transfer calls are automatically routed to the designated Secretary Up to 6 Executive Secretary Pairs can reside on the System Figure 2 9 1 describes the call handling of a CO call to an Executive Station belonging to an Executive Secretary Pair If the Executive Station is idle the Executive Station will receive the CO call If the Executive Station is busy or in DND mode the designated Secretary Station will receive the CO call CO ICM Executive Secretary pairs Sec STA 111 Exec STA 110 Calls Exec STA 110 FIGURE 2 9 1 EXECUTIVE SECRETARY CALL HANDLING Operation To activate an Executive Secretary Transfer from the Executive s DKTU perf
58. Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 80 Account Code feature 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes To enter an Account Code before accessing a CO Line perform the following Steps 1 Press the programmed ACCOUNT CODE flexible button 2 Dial the account code max 12 digits or the key 3 The Intercom dial tone should be heard and a CO Line is secured to make a call To enter an Account Code during a conversation with an external party perform the following Steps 1 Press the programmed ACCOUNT CODE flexible button 2 Dial the account code max 12 digits 3 Press the programmed ACCOUNT CODE flexible button the User will be reconnected to the external party To enter an Account Code without the ACCOUNT CODE button during a conversation with an external party perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 550 refer to Ref A 3 Dial the account code maximum 12 digits or the key then reconnect to the external party Condition While entering an Account Code the current call is put on MUTE mode The User may enter the Account Code before a call conversation is established Admin Programming Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual SMDR Account Enter Code PGM 106 74 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 5 2 Authorization Code Description If a Stati
59. Press the Flexible Button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Type the Feature Code refer to flexible button Programming codes in the Admin Programming Manual 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to save changes To assign a direct button i e CO or DSS button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Type the desired code 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To assign Telephone Number LDP 7224 perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Press the TEL NUM soft button 4 Enter the desired telephone number 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition A flexible button that is not assigned as CO LINE button is considered a Feature button and is programmable at each Station When CO Line Programming PGM 112 FLEX6 is enabled the flexible button that is assigned as CO LINE button can be programmed The Program code can be changed by setting PGM 104 107 109 depending on the User s needs in this case the code can be programmed on a flexible button or CO Line button Admin Programming Flexible Button Assignment PGM 115 CO Line Programming PGM 112 FLEX6 50 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 12 Headset Description An industry standard Headset can be connected to a Sta
60. Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 11 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 14 Error Tone for TAD ON OFF OFF Provides busy tone to TAD when caller hangs up 15 SLT Flash Drop ON OFF OFF Drop calls by pressing FLASH button or hook flash 16 Loop LCR Account Code ON OFF OFF Must enter Account Code to access LCR 17 VMIB Message Type FIFO LIFO LIFO Determines order VMIB messages are played 18 Off Net Call Forward ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE Determines Off Net Call Forward function availability 19 Forced Hands Free ON OFF OFF Forces the Hands Free State at Called Station 20 CIDSLT CAS GAIN 00 20 5 Not available in LDK 1248 21 CIDSLT FSK GAIN 00 20 5 Not available in LDK 1248 22 Caller Voice Over ON OFF OFF Forces Voice Over at busy Called Station 23 Reserved 1 CO Warning Tone ON OFF OFF Call Restriction Timer notification 2 Automatic Hold ON OFF OFF Automatically places current call on hold when Station accesses another CO Line while on the call 3 CO Call Timer Restriction ON OFF OFF Call Restriction Timer disconnects call when timer expires 4 Individual CO Line Access ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE Determines use of a Code for dialing Individual CO Line Access 5 CO Line Queuing ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE CO Line Callback to Station when outgoing line is busy 6 CO PGM ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Program a Flexible Button to access a CO Line 7
61. RESERV 8 SLIB VMIB 00 63 40 9 SLIB DTMF 00 63 28 10 SLIB TONE 00 63 38 11 SLIB MUSIC1 00 63 40 12 SLIB MUSIC2 00 63 40 400 13 SLIB RESERV ACOB RX Gain 1 ACOB DKT 00 63 28 2 ACOB SLT 00 63 32 3 ACOB RESERV 00 63 4 ACOB RESERV 00 63 5 ACOB ACO 00 63 36 6 ACOB RESERV 00 63 7 ACOB RESERV 8 ACOB VMIB 00 63 37 9 ACOB DTMF 00 63 37 10 ACOB TONE 00 63 37 11 SLIB MUSIC1 00 63 37 12 ACOB MUSIC2 00 63 37 13 ACOB RESERV 404 14 ACOB MODEM 00 63 37 VMIB RX Gain 407 1 VMIB DKT 00 63 21 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 86 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 2 VMIB SLT 00 63 21 3 VMIB RESERV 00 63 4 VMIB RESERV 00 63 5 VMIB ACO 00 63 23 6 VMIB RESERV 00 63 7 VMIB RESERV 8 VMIB RESERV 32 9 VMIB RESERV 32 DTMF RC Gain 1 DTMF SLT 00 63 17 2 DTMF RESERV 00 63 3 DTMF ACO 00 63 15 4 DTMF RESERV 00 63 408 5 DTMF RESERV EXT PAGE Gain 1 EXT DKT 00 63 26 2 EXT SLT 00 63 26 3 EXT RESERV 00 63 4 EXT RESERV 00 63 5 EXT ACO 00 63 28 6 EXT RESERV 00 63 7 EXT RESERV 8 EXT VMIB 00 63 37 9 EXT MUSIC1 00 63 37 10 EXT MUSIC2 00 63 37 409 11 EXT RESERV 00 63 37 CPT Gain 1 CPT ACO 00 63 15 2 CPT RESERV 00 63 410 3 CPT RESERV MODEM Gain 1 MODEM ACO 00 63 20 2 MODEM RESE
62. Serial Number 9 PC Phone Lock Key 0 Attendant Attendant Only System Enter Admin Admin Only Operation To enter Programming mode perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button the Main Menu should display 2 Use the up and down arrow keys to view other choices in the Main Menu Sub Menu and the corresponding options To select a menu perform the following Steps 1 Dial the number of the desired menu item if the selected menu is a programming item 2 If there is an available Sub Menu the appropriate menu is displayed on the LCD NOTE Press the TRANS PGM button to move the top menu Press the REDIAL button to move the previous menu Condition After a menu is programmed the previous menu list is displayed on the LCD Press a button in the Main Menu mode to activate the flexible button programming mode Admin Programming B Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Station Programming Section 4 Quick Reference Admin Programming Tables C Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Attendant Programming Section 4 Quick Reference Admin Programming Tables 61 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 22 Station Relocation Description The Station Relocation feature allows a User to unplug their Station and move it to another location on the System Dialing a code followed
63. Station in the Group When System Hold is activated calls can be accessed by other Stations in the Group Reference A System Exclusive Hold 2 3 3 Admin Programming Hold Preference PGM 160 FLEX8 2 3 3 3 Automatic Hold Description When a Station is connected to a CO call the Station User can make another intercom call just by pressing the DSS button In this case the previous CO call is automatically held Operation To use Automatic Hold while on a CO Line call perform the following Steps 1 Press the CO button 2 When the new CO Line is connected the previous CO call is placed in the Admin Programmed preferred Hold state Admin Programming Automatic Hold PGM 112 FLEX2 2 3 3 4 Park Description A User can Park a call in a virtual location and then make a Page announcement for the desired User to pick up the Parked call The Paged User can retrieve the call by dialing the designated location number NOTE A Station must have a CO or LOOP button to retrieve a parked call 36 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Operation To Park a call perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial the parking location 601 608 refer to Ref A 3 Replace the handset or go on hook 4 Page the desired User to retrieve the call To retrieve the Parked call from a DKTU perform the following 1 Lift the hands
64. Station programming Users can program Stations by selecting the desired menu refer to Table The Attendant also can program a Station and the Attendant Station the same way refer to Ref A STATION PROGRAMMING MENU MAIN MENU SUB MENU OPTIONS REMARK 1 Ring 1 Type 1 2 3 4 DKTU 2 Answer Mode H 1 T 2 P 3 3 SMS MSG Display 4 En block Mode 1 ON OFF 2 COS 1 COS Down ICM COS7 2 COS Restore Enter Authorization Code 3 Walking COS Enter Authorization Code 4 COS Change India Only 3 Authorize Mobile Ext 1 Authorization Register 2 Authorization Change 3 Register Mobile Ext Not Supported 60 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 MAIN MENU SUB MENU OPTIONS REMARK 4 Active Mobile Ext Not Supported 4 Time 1 Set Wake up Time Once Permanent 2 Wake up Time 5 Message 1 Set Pre selected Message 00 10 2 Set Custom Message None 6 Announce 1 Record User Greeting 2 Listen Time Date 3 Listen Station Number 4 Listen Station Status 5 Record Page Message 6 Erase User Greeting 7 Erase Page Message 7 supplementary 1 LCD Display Language Domestic English DKTU 2 MBU Version Display 3 BGM 4 Register Station Name 2 8 FLEX SLT 5 Speaker Headset Speaker Headset 6 Headset Ring Mode Speaker Headset Both 7 WTU Station Number 8
65. The attributes of CO to CO COS is the same as Station COS In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 166 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 166 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Day COS COS of Day Mode FLEX1 2 Range 1 7 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default 7 Night Weekend COS COS of Night Weekend Mode FLEX2 2 Range 1 7 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default 7 3 3 8 DISA Destination PGM 167 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 167 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 167 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Busy Destination When there is a DISA incoming call if and caller dialed a busy destination the call will be routed to the Busy Destination refer to VALUES FLEX1 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant ring assignment FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group Error Destination When there is a DISA incoming call if the caller dialed an invalid number the call will be routed to the Error Destination refer to VALUES FLEX2 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant ring assignment FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group No Answer Destination When there is a DISA incoming call if the destination does not answer the call will be routed to the No Answer Destination re
66. and or ring at the Attendant before the caller hangs up 125 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Speed of Answer The average elapsed time from when a call is terminated by the Attendant the when the call is answered by an attendant Type Type of Attendant System or Main or Intercom Tenancy group Operation To print the Attendant Traffic report perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0124 3 Select Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button the report will be printed the following is a sample report Site Name Report Type Attendant Traffic Report Yesterday Total Date 02 12 04 13 14 Atd Meas Calls Time Time Speed Atd No Hour Total Ans Abnd H Abd Held Avail Talk Held No Ans Ans Type 2629 9 3 6 0 0 02 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Sys 4807 8 6 2 0 0 04 21 00 13 00 00 00 09 00 04 Main 3619 4 4 0 0 0 01 04 00 21 00 00 00 01 Main 2618 0 0 0 0 0 00 05 00 00 00 00 Main 3629 6 1 5 0 0 02 58 00 23 00 00 00 14 00 03 Main 2 14 2 Call Reports Description The ARIA SOHO System supports the following report to analyze the call status of the System Call Summary report Monitor the day s traffic
67. box signal FLEX6 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON No Touch Answer If this value is set to ON the Station can respond to a transferred CO call automatically when Station mode is Hands free HF or in Privacy P mode FLEX7 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Page Access If this value is set to ON Station can page another Station FLEX8 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 8 PGM111 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Ring Type If this value is not O OFF the selected ring type is heard at the called party Station of an intercom call FLEX9 1 Ring Type HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 Ring Type 2 Ring Type 3 Ring Type 4 Ring Type Speaker Ring Determines if an incoming call will ring to the speaker the handset or both FLEX10 1 Speaker HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 Speaker S 2 Headset H 3 Both B Speakerphone If this value is set to ON Speakerphone can be used FLEX11 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Error Tone for Telephone Answering Device TAD If this value is set to ON and TAD is used on the SLT port when the caller hangs up a busy tone will be provided to TAD instead of an error tone FLEX14 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON SLT Flash Drop If this value is set to ON CO calls can be d
68. by the old Station number brings all the Station attributes including Station number button mapping Speed Dial and Class of Service refer to Ref C to the new location Operation To store the Station attributes to a temporary buffer perform the following Steps 1 Dial the feature code and press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the key and dial 1 Station Relocation Backup 3 Unplug the Station To retrieve the Station attributes perform the following 1 Plug the phone into the new properly wired jack 2 Press the TRANS PGM button 3 Press the key and dial 2 Station Relocation Retrieve 4 The Station will be relocated all Station attributes are copied to the current Station location Condition All information for the port of destination Station will be retained so that it may be copied or relocated to another port If a different Station type is plugged in at a location preprogrammed DSS buttons are not guaranteed DKTU s must be relocated to another digital port DKTU s cannot be relocated to an SLT port Reference A Class of Service 2 5 4 62 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 23 Station Serial Call Description Using DSS flexible buttons Users can place consecutive intercom calls without returning the line to an idle state no need to hang up between calls Operation To use Serial Calling perform th
69. code at a Station 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 31 3 Enter the desired authorization code 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition Authorization should be registered to use Follow Me Call Forward Admin Programming Allow Off Net Call Forward PGM 111 FLEX18 Authorization Code Table PGM 227 Call Forward PGM 111 FLEX2 Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 FLEX1 Off Net Call Mode PGM 112 FLEX12 Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 FLEX6 2 3 1 9 SLT Call Forward Description A SLT User can forward calls to other Stations CC Lines or System VMIB Operation To activate Call Forward from a SLT perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Call Forward code 554 refer to Ref A 3 Dial the call forward type 4 Dial the Station or Group Speed number that will receive the call OR 5 Press the key to forward to System VMIB 6 Go on hook by replacing the handset 30 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To deactivate Call Forward from a SLT perform the following 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Call Forward code 554 and number OR 3 Dial 559 refer to Ref B 4 Confirmation tone should be heard then replace the handset Condition Call Forward is maintained until it is deactivated A call cannot be forwarded to a Station in DND
70. digits Remove Number Admin PGM222 FLEX3 3 Number of Remove 01 12 00 Determines value of digit stream to remove on user dialed digits Removal Position Admin PGM222 FLEX2 4 Add Position 1 13 1 Determines position of digit stream to add on user dialed digits Add Digit Stream Admin PGM222 FLEX1 5 CO Line Group 0 8 1 Determines when LCR will secure an open CO Line 6 Alternative DMT Index 00 99 Determines when LCR can not secure the CO Line DMT Index will be used to locate an open CO Line LCR Table Initialization Determines the new LCR Admin Table entry value 1 DMT of Day Zone1 6 Digits Determines the new DMT Index value of Day Zone1 2 DMT of Day Zone2 6 Digits Determines the new DMT Index value of Day Zone2 3 DMT of Day Zone3 6 Digits Determines the new DMT Index value of Day Zone3 4 CO Group Initialization 0 8 Determines the new DMT Index value of all CO Line Groups 5 Alternative Index Initialization 0 99 Determines the new DMT Index value of the Alternative DMT Index 223 6 Initialize All LCR Determines the new DMT Index value of all LCR Admin data TOLL TABLE ASSIGNMENT PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Toll Table 1 Allow Table A 01 30 2 Deny Table A 01 30 3 Allow Table B 01 30 4 Deny Table B 01 30 5 Allow Table C 01 50 6 Deny Table C 01 50 7 Allow Table D 01 50 224 8 Deny Table D 01 50 Max 14 Digits
71. erase the previous ROM data and start to fill ARIA SOHO ROM area with the received ROM file Condition While upgrading process other features do not work in the system When the ARIA SOHO MBU software upgrade is finished without completing you can retry to upgrade by doing the whole process again 6 If the ROM files you want to send are invalid ARIA SOHO MBU software upgrade will not be started Admin Programming IP Setting for MBU 3 2 8 PGM 108 133 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 15 3 Serial COM Port Description The ARIA SOHO MPB software can be upgraded through the RS 232C interface using the ARIA SOHO upgrade program from a remote PC connected to the System Operation To upgrade using the Serial COM Port perform the following Steps 1 Connect the RS 232C cable between the ARIA SOHO System and the PC 2 Run the ARIA SOHO PC Upgrade program 3 Select the ARIA SOHO System to be upgraded 4 Click on the OK button 5 Select the port type Serial Connection 6 Click on the Select button 7 Enter the Serial Port number Admin Password and select the serial port Baud Rate 8 Click the Next button 134 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 9 Click on the Start button the ARIA SOHO MPB software download will begin 10 While t
72. mode when trying to forward to the Station an error tone will be heard A call forwarding Station cannot leave a VMIB message The Call Forward feature may be canceled by code 559 the unified cancel code for DND Call Forward Message for SLT Dial pulse SLT cannot be forwarded to VMIB Reference A Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Call forward Code Admin 106 FLEX14 B Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual DND FWD Cancel Code Admin 106 FLEX19 2 3 1 10 Preset Call Forward Description When a Station receives incoming CO Calls and the Station is programmed to Preset Call Forward the call is routed to the Preset Call Forward destination if the Station does not answer within the Preset Call Forward Timer The destination can be another Station or Hunt Group Condition In Preset Call Forward a busy Station will not receive a CO Line ring and the next assigned Station will receive the CO Line ring If the Station is not forwarded to another destination then the call will not be forwarded and will continue to ring at the Station until answered The Preset Call Forward loop feature is not available A gt B gt C gt A When a CO Line is forwarded with Preset Call Forward the original Station will stop ringing the LED of CO button will flash continuously If there is no direct CO button or LOOP button at the destination Station the Station will be by
73. not be able to be made through the CO Line incoming CO calls are not affected Operation To set a CO Line in out of outgoing service from the Attendant perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 073 3 Press the desired CO LINE flexible button a confirmation tone should be heard when the status in or out of outgoing service of the selected CO Line is changed 4 Press the MON button to return to idle Condition Any attendant can use this feature The LED of the CO Line flexible button which is out of outgoing service will flash at the Attendant Station but illuminate at other stations To release the out of outgoing service press the flashing CO LINE flexible button at the Attendant Station Though the desired CO Line is busy the Attendant can still make the CO Line out of outgoing service which will take effect after the CO Line returns to idle 121 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 13 10 ICM Box Music Selection Description The Attendant can select the music channel source to provide the Intercom box Operation To select the music source from the Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 075 3 Dial the music source 00 08 the music source should be heard but if the music channel has no music source then no music will be heard Channel 00 Music is
74. one of Today s peak time Yesterday s peak time Last hour Yesterday s total and Today s total The report provides the following fields Type The type of H W unit being measured Number of Units The total number of installed H W units Analysis Start Hour The starting time of the last hour or the hour with the highest Peak Req measurement Total Requests The System wide total number of requests by call processing for DTMF CPTU and VMIB during the listed hour it is calculated by incrementing a counter for each request Total Demand The System wide total number of requests that are denied because there is no available H W unit during the listed hour Operation To print the H W Unit Usage Summary report from the Main Attendant Station perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0127 3 Select the Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button the report will be printed the following is a sample report Site Name Report Type H W Unit Usage Summary Report Yesterday Total Date 02 12 04 13 15 Unit Num Anal Total Total Type Unit Hour Req Denied VMIB 4 27 0 DTMF 13 27 0 CPTU 12 27 0 128 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006
75. passed to the overflow Station Group VMIB System Speed Bin after the Overflow Timer expires FLEX7 Destination Type refer to VALUES Range 1 4 HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 Station 2 Hunt 3 VMIB 00 70 00 Not Assigned 4 System Speed 2000 2499 Overflow Timer If the timer expires after a call is received in the group the call will be routed to the Overflow Destination FLEX8 Seconds Range 000 600 HOLD SAVE Wrap up Timer Designates the amount of time a call will be held in a busy state following expiration of the timer FLEX9 Seconds Range 002 999 HOLD SAVE Alt If No Member If a member is not on duty intercom calls will be dropped and CO incoming calls will be routed to the designated overflow destination or will ring at the assigned Station if the overflow destination is not assigned FLEX10 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Music Source If a music source is assigned the caller will be able to hear music instead of a ring back tone FLEX11 Music Source refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 Not assigned by this field 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 RESERVED 4 8 SLT MOH ACD Warning Tone When a call is received in the Group and no Stations are available the call will be routed to the assigned destination FLEX12 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Alt Destination If no members a
76. peak time Yesterday s peak time Last hour Yesterday s total and Today s total To print the Call Summary Traffic report perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0121 3 Select Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To print the Call Summary Traffic report periodically perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0122 3 Select Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel periodic printing of the Call summary Traffic report perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0123 3 Select Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button 124 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To print each Traffic report perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0124 0129 3 Select Measurement Time type or CO group number if applicable 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition This feature is available from the Main Attendant Station The printing of All Summary service will generate the Attendant Traffic report Call Summary report H W Usage Summary report and CO Traffic Summary report Reference A Attendant Service 2 13 Admin Programming Print Port Selection PGM 175 2 14 1 Attendant Reports Description The ARIA SOHO System supports the following report to analyze the A
77. registered trademarks of their respective companies ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 2 Revision History ISSUE DATE CONTENTS OF CHANGES REMARK ISSUE 0 3 2006 06 DRAFT Release ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 I Table of Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 Manual Usage 1 2 ADMIN PROGRAMMING PREPARATION 2 2 1 Entering Programming Mode 3 2 1 1 Permanent Update Procedure 3 2 1 2 Resetting the System 4 2 2 Pre Programming 5 3 ADMIN PROGRAMMING 6 3 1 Station PGM110 131 6 3 1 1 Station amp DSS DLS Map ID PGM1
78. set to a non zero number outgoing CO calls will be restricted and disconnected following expiration of the designated timer FLEX12 VALUE minutes 2 digits range 00 99 Barge In Mode Designates if the intruding Station can listen in or listen to and join the call in progress FLEX13 1 Monitor Mode HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 Monitor Mode The intruding extension can listen to the existing conversation but cannot participate 2 Speech Mode The intruding extension can listen and join in the existing conversation ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 14 3 1 5 Station Attribute IV PGM 114 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 114 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number or Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM114 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP LCD Display If this value is set to ON the CLI is displayed on the Station s LCD on incoming calls FLEX1 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES Default ON for Attendant Station 0 OFF 1 ON Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP LCD Display If this value is set to ON the connected party CLI is displayed on the Station LCD FLEX2 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON CLI Redirect Display If this value is se
79. the CCR Table If a call is routed to the System Speed Dial the call will be routed to the applicable Speed Dial destination If the CO call is assigned to System Speed Dial the routing will be the same as Incoming CO Off Net Forward Reference A Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 1 3 B VMIB Announcement 2 11 5 C DISA Authorization Code 2 5 2 D System Speed Dial 2 2 8 5 Admin Programming DISA Retry Counter PGM 160 FLEX4 CCR Inter Digit Timer PGM 180 FLEX15 Inter Digit Timer PGM 181 FLEX8 DID DISA Destination PGM 167 Custom Call Routing PGM 228 6 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 1 5 CO Line Name Description This feature allows the capability to name each CO Line Stations with an LCD interface screen including the Attendant Station will display the programmed CO Line Name in place of the default LINE XXX display Condition This applies to all conditions where the LINE XX message is displayed However SMDR will display the Line number in place of the programmed name refer to Ref A A CO Line Name can be assigned to each CO Line Each CO Line Name can contain up to 12 characters If the CO Line Name display is set to OFF at Admin 142 with FLEX1 selected the CO Line Name is not displayed even if the name is programmed Reference A Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 12 Admin Programming
80. the programmed CO Group and send the modified digits according to LCR programming When a User selects a CO Line and dials a destination number the System checks the LCR programming and sends the all according to the least cost route according to the Admin program Figure 2 2 7 Caller dials 9 and phone no 850 1234 Network 001 002 008 Network A Network C Network B ARIA SOHO FIGURE 2 2 7 LCR ROUTING Assuming the LCR code is 9 the Network A 001 is least cost during the daytime and Network B 002 is least cost during the night The caller dials the same number and the System automatically routes it through the least cost network Operation To activate internal LCR perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the internal LCR code or press the MON button on hook dialing can also activate LCR 3 It is an internal LCR code if the code is programmed with INTERNAL or BOTH in the Leading Digit Table 14 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To activate Loop LCR perform the following 1 Dial the COL LCR code after dialing the first accessible CO Line or CO Group Access code 0 or 9 or press the LOOP button 2 It is a COL LCR code if the code is programmed with COL or BOTH in the Leading digit Table To activate Direct CO LCR perform the following 1 Dial the COL LCR code after dialing a CO or CO G
81. the volume up down keys can be used to scroll through them To Register Linked Station Pairs FLEX2 Master Station Number PGM number SPEED HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 VIEW FLEX2 INPUT Range 10 57 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 51 3 4 System Timers PGM 180 182 3 4 1 System Timers I PGM 180 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 180 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 180 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Attendant Recall Timer If a recalled call arrives at the Attendant Station and the Attendant does not answer within the designated time the System will disconnect the call FLEX1 Minutes 2 digits Range 00 60 HOLD SAVE Call Park Recall Timer Designates the amount of time before a call placed in park location will recall at the Station that placed the call on park FLEX2 Seconds 3 digits Range 000 600 HOLD SAVE Camp On Recall Timer When a call is transferred using Camp On to a busy Station if the transferred to Station does not answer the call it will recall to the transferring station after the designated time expires FLEX3 Seconds 3 digits Range 000 200 HOLD SAVE Exclusive Hold Recall Timer Designates the amount of time before a call placed on system hold will recall at a Station that placed the call on ho
82. the appropriate Hunt Group number 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to save changes NOTE A UCD Group can not be designated as an alternative loop destination Condition The ARIA SOHO System supports VMIB announcements for hunt Groups When a call is received at the secondary VMIB announcement the caller can be connected to another Station by the entered number with CCR Service PGM 228 2 6 6 Automatic Call Distribution ACD Description A separate supervisor or common supervisor can be assigned in a UCD Group The supervisor can monitor the status of the Group When a call is queued to a Group for longer than a predefined time or when a predefined number of calls are queued the supervisor s LCD will indicate the number of calls in queue and the queued tome for the longest queue The supervisor can change the overflow destination and timing The System will provide traffic refer to Ref A and online status reports based on the supervisor s request for the UCD Group including the following Group statistics Total calls Number of unanswered calls Average and the longest queued calls Number and the total time when all agents are busy Average ringing time before answer Average service time after answer Operation To monitor an agent s conversation from the ACD Supervisor Station perform the following 1 Call the busy agent and receive a busy tone 2 Press the ACD flexible button 3 The Supervisor
83. time before a CO line can be re seized after a CO call disconnects controls the time necessary to guarantee an idle loop state when a line is released FLEX19 VALUE 100 m sec 3 digits Range 001 150 HOLD SAVE CO Ring OFF Timer Used to designate the time interval between incoming ringing signals so that active ringing can be retained in the System until the timer expires FLEX20 VALUE 100 m sec 3 digits Range 001 150 HOLD SAVE CO Ring ON Timer Controls the time necessary to detect an incoming CO call ringing into the System FLEX21 VALUE 100 m sec 1 digit Range 0060 900 HOLD SAVE CO Warning Tone Timer Korea Only Determines the amount of time before receiving a warning tone as a reminder of the elapsed call time on an outgoing CO line conversation FLEX22 Seconds 3 digits Range 060 900 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 53 3 4 2 System Timers II PGM 181 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 181 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 181 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Call Forward No Answer Timer If value is set for No Answer Call Forward when the Station does not answer then the call will be routed to the assigned forward destination following the expiration of the timer FLEX1 Seconds 3 digits Range 000 255
84. to Ref A 2 The message number prompt is heard and the voice message FIFO or LIFO and Time amp Date stamp for the message will be played 3 Pressing the CONF button during playback will delete the current message and the next message will begin For SLT and 2 8 BTN DKTU Dial 1 and press the HOLD SAVE button the current message will be saved and the next message will begin playback Dial 2 and press the CALLBK button the current message will be played again Dial 3 4 Press the ADD Soft Button to record an additional message available on LDP 7224D with 3 Soft Buttons 5 Press the REWIND Soft Button to rewind the current message in accordance to the VM MSG Rewind timer available on the LDP 7224D with Soft Buttons Condition There is no time limit for recording a User greeting at a Station When a caller leaves a voice message wait the recording time is controlled by a Valid User Message timer PGM 181 FLEX4 and VMIB User Record timer PGM 181 FLEX3 When the recorded message is shorter than the Valid User Message timer the message will not be saved When the User Record timer expires a confirmation tone will be heard and the message will be saved at the Station If the Station has several messages to be retrieved by pressing the CALLBK button the message only with the Station number will be retrieved first the message wait priority is with Station number gt VMIB Message wait gt
85. to a busy Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 The intercom dial tone should be heard and the active call will be placed on exclusive hold 3 Dial the Station number that will receive the transferring call and go on hook by replacing the handset 4 If the call is unanswered during the Transfer Recall timer the call will be recalled to the transferring Station and the Attendant will receive a recall ring if the call remains unanswered To make an unscreened transfer from a SLT perform the following Steps 1 Press and release the hook switch the intercom dial tone should be heard 2 The CO Line should be placed on exclusive hold and the Transfer Recall timer will be activated 3 Dial the Station number the call will be transferred to and go on hook by replacing the handset 33 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To make a screened transfer from a SLT perform the following Steps 1 Press and release the hook switch the intercom dial tone should be heard 2 The CO Line should be placed on exclusive hold and the Transfer Recall timer will be activated 3 Dial the Station number the call will be transferred to 4 When the dialed Station answers announce the call and go on hook by replacing the handset Condition When the Attendant is enables with DSS and a Station programmed in DSS receives transferred call
86. to be able to use the Lost Call Log Admin Programming Call Log List Number PGM 160 FLEX19 CLI MSG Wait PGM 114 FLEX4 2 4 32 In Room Indication Description When a Supervisor presses a programmed In Room Indication button and the HOLD SAVE button in an idle state the LED In Room Indication button of all network member phones will illuminate Up to 10 groups consisting of up to 20 members not including the Supervisor can be programmed Operation To program a flexible button as the In Room Indication button perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Dial the code TRANS PGM 8 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To activate or deactivate the In Room Indication button perform the following 1 Verify if the Supervisor station is in an idle state and the In Room Indication button has been programmed 2 Press the In Room Indication button and press the HOLD SAVE button 70 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition If the Supervisor station is not in an idle state the In Room Indication button will not work If a Station presses the In Room Indication button at a station other than the Supervisor an error tone will be presented If the HOLD SAVE button is not pressed within 5 seconds after the In Room Indication button is pressed the station will return t
87. 0 2 4 22 Station Relocation 62 2 4 23 Station Serial Call 63 2 4 24 Voice Over 63 2 4 25 Wake Up 64 I ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 26 Automatic Fax Transfer 65 2 4 27 Extend CO to CO Connection 66 2 4 28 Forced Hands Free Mode 66 2 4 29 Hot Desk 67 2 4 30 Analogue CLI Display 68 2 4 31 Call Log
88. 0 SLT Hold SLT 561 Forced Log In 562 Forced Log Out 563 Programming Mode Enter Code SLT 564 ACD Route 565 Alarm Reset 566 Group Call Pickup 568 UCD DND 569 Night Answer 601 608 Call Parking Locations 7 Direct Call Pickup 8XX CO Line Group Access 88XX Individual CO Access 8 Retrieve Held CO Line 8 xx Retrieve Held Individual CO Line 9 or 0 depending on a Nation Access CO Line in the 1st Available CO Line Group 0 or 9 depending on a Nation Attendant Call ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 2 FUNCTION CODE ITEM REMARK 1 1st Door Open 2 2nd Door Open 3 3rd Door Open 4 4th Door Open 8 VM Message Waiting Enable 9 VM Message Waiting Disable The following numbering plan is fixed so it can not be changed by Admin Programming STATION PROGRAMMING FUNCTION CODE ITEM REMARK 11 Differential Ring Keyset 12 Intercom Answer Mode 1HF 2Tone 3PV Keyset 13 SMS Message Display LDP Keyset 14 Enblock Mode LDP Keyset 15 SMS Notice Display Not Supported 16 Scroll Speed Not Supported 17 Ear MIc Headset LDP Keyset 18 ICM Ring LDP Keyset 19 CO Ring LDP Keyset 21 Station COS Down LDP Keyset 22 Station COS Restore 23 Walking COS Keyset 31 Authorization Code Registration 32 Authorization Code Change 33 Registration Mobile Extension Not Supported 34
89. 0 135 DSS DLS Map2 Station Ports 136 151 DSS DLS Map3 Blank 3 1 2 Station Attributes I PGM 111 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 111 3 Enter the appropriate Station number or Station Range 4 Following the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM111 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Auto Speaker Select If this value is set to ON the Station User can access a CO line or make a DSS call by pressing the appropriate CO or DSS button without lifting the handset or pressing the MON button 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Call Forward If this value is set to ON an incoming call can be forwarded to the other destination FLEX2 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON DND If this value is set to ON an incoming call can be denied FLEX3 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Data Line Security If this value is set to ON override and camp on from other Stations are prohibited when this Station is busy FLEX4 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Howling Tone SLT If this value is set to ON System gives a howling tone loud error when phone is in the off hook state without action for an extended period of time FLEX5 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Intercom Box Signaling If this value is set to ON Station can receive an intercom
90. 00 Bin 00 CO Group 02 15 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Ex 3 Password for specific dial number The International access code is 001 System Administrator allows International calls by only those Users who know the System password ADMIN 220 ADMIN 221 LDT ADMIN 222 DMT LCR Mode M12 M13 Loop LCR enabled Bin 000 LCR Type COL LCR Code 001 DMT 00 00 00 Check Password ON Bin 00 CO Group 01 Condition There are 6 LCR modes The mode is determined by Admin 220 FLEX1 LCR Access Mode 00 M00 LCR call is disabled LCR Access Mode 01 M01 Only Loop LCR is activated LCR Access Mode 02 M02 Internal LCR and Loop LCR are activated LCR Access Mode 11 M11 Loop LCR and CO LCR are activated LCR Access Mode 12 M12 All types of LCR are activated when dialing 9 or pressing the Loop key the System will wait for the next digits to compare to the LCR Table before securing a CO Line LCR Access Mode 13 M13 All types of LCR are activated when dialing 9 0r pressing the Loop key the System will secure the first available CO Line and wait for the next digits to compare to the LCR Table The leading digits can be duplicated FLEX2 and the DMT index make each entry unique The Leading Digit Table is sorted by leading digits FLEX2 in LDT INT COL BOTH and DMT index Internal LCR is applied if the dial
91. 06 60 PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Music Source If a music source is assigned the caller will be able to hear music instead of a ring back tone FLEX13 Music Source refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 Not assigned by this field 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 RESERVED 4 8 SLT MOH Alt Destination If no members are on duty or all members are busy incoming CO calls will be routed to an alternate destination FLEX14 Destination Type refer to VALUES Station or Hunt Group Number HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 Station 2 Hunt Max Queue Count If no members are on duty or all members are busy incoming CO calls will be queued The Hunt Group Supervisor will be able to see the queued incoming call count until the Max Queue Count is attained FLEX15 VALUE 2 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE Member Forward If this value is set to ON the Hunt Member cannot receive Hunt Group calls FLEX16 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Queue Count Display If this value is set to ON the Hunt Member can check the Queue Count FLEX17 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 61 3 5 3 UCD Group Attribute If the Hunt Group Type is set as UCD the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 191 3 Enter the appropriate H
92. 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 06 2 Dial the message number the announcement Press the key to record should be heard If a previously recorded message is dialed the corresponding message will be played 3 Press the key to start recording if applicable the announcement Record your message and a confirmation tone will be heard prior to the Recording timer starting OR 4 Press the key to record using an external music port on the MBU 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to finish recording a confirmation tone should be heard 6 A new message can then be recorded 7 Press the MON button while recording to stop and save the recorded message To delete System greetings from the Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 06 record code 3 Dial the appropriate message number if a message has already been recorded at that number it will be played 4 Press the SPEED button while the message is playing to delete it To add additional messages perform the following 1 Press the ADD soft button while listening to the message LDP 7024D 2 Record the additional message desired 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button when finished 101 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To rewind the current message perform the following Steps 1 Press the REWIND soft button t
93. 1 250 HOLD SAVE SLT Minimum Hook Flash Timer SLT Only Used to designate the minimum time needed for the System to register a hook flash FLEX3 VALUE 10 m sec 3 digits Range 000 250 HOLD SAVE SLT Ring Phase Timer Designates the ring phase or cadence ex 5 sec 1 sec ON 4 sec OFF FLEX4 VALUE 10 m sec 1 digit Range 2 5 HOLD SAVE Station Auto Release Timer If a Station hears a Ring Back Tone and no action is taken within the designated time the Station will be released FLEX5 VALUE 10 m sec 3 digits Range 020 300 HOLD SAVE Unsupervised Conference Timer Designates the amount of the time an unsupervised conference can continue after the initiator of the conference has exited FLEX6 Minutes 2 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE Wake Up Fail Ring Timer Designates the amount of time a Wake up Fail Ring will ring at the System Attendant Station FLEX7 Minutes 2 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE Warm Line Timer Designates the amount of time before a warm line state exists on an idle line after lifting the handset or pressing the MON button FLEX8 Seconds 2 digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE Wink Timer Designates the amount of time needed to acknowledge a signal on a DID line FLEX9 VALUE 10 m sec 3 digits Range 010 200 HOLD SAVE CCR Time Out Timer When this timer expires CCR is activated FLEX11 Seconds 2 digits
94. 10 6 3 1 2 Station Attributes I PGM 111 7 3 1 3 Station Attributes II PGM 112 9 3 1 4 Station Attributes III PGM113 12 3 1 5 Station Attribute IV PGM 114 14 3 1 6 Flexible Button Assignment PGM 115 15 3 1 7 Station COS PGM 116 16 3 1 8 CO Line Group Access PGM 117 17 3 1 9 Page Zones PGM 118 119 17 3 1 10 Intercom Tenancy Group PGM 120 18 3 1 11 Intercom Preset Call Forward PGM 121 18 3 1 12 Idle Line Selection PGM 122
95. 2 FLEX3 Number of Digits to be Removed RN NONE 01 12 FLEX4 Add Position AP 01 01 13 FLEX5 CO Line Group C 01 1 8 FLEX6 Alternative DMT Index ALT NONE 00 24 99 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 222 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Added Digit Stream This value is used to add digit stream for User dialed digits refer to Add Position PGM 222 FLEX4 FLEX1 VALUE2 20 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE VALUES CALLBK Pause DND FOR Dial tone detection instead of pause enter FLASH Station Number Billing code Removal Position Used to set the removal position for User dialed digits Some digits will be removed from the designated position up to this amount FLEX2 VALUE2 2 digits Range 01 12 HOLD SAVE Add Position Used to set the add position fro User dialed digits Some digits are added from the designated position with Add Digit Stream FLEX4 VALUE2 2 digits Range 01 13 HOLD SAVE CO Line Group Used when LCR calls secure the outgoing CO line The idle CO line within the CO Line Group of the determined value is seized for LCR calls FLEX5 VALUE2 2 digits Range 01 08 HOLD SAVE Alternative DMT Index Used when LCR calls are unable to secure an idle CO line within the Admin PGM 222 FLEX5 LCR calls will seize an idle CO Line Group of this value from the DMT Index FLEX6 VALUE2 2 digi
96. 2006 76 PGM 224 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Allow Table B Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS3 and COS4 Station match with the allowed toll pass digits NOTE Allow Table B is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS3 or 4 FLEX3 VALUE refer to Allow Table Range 01 30 Allow Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Deny Table B Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS3 and COS4 Station match with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Deny Table B is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS3 or 4 FLEX4 VALUE refer to Deny Table Range 01 30 Deny Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Allow Table C Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS8 Station match with the allowed toll pass digits NOTE Allow Table C is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS8 FLEX5 VALUE refer to Allow Table Range 01 30 Allow Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Deny Table C Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS8 Station match with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Deny Table C is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS8 FLEX6 VALUE refer to Deny Table Range 01 30 Deny Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Allow Table D Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS9 Station match with the allowed toll pass digits NOTE
97. 3 Digits 180 Sec Determines time delay call will be routed to Overflow Destination Admin PGM191 FLEX7 7 Overflow Destination STA HUNT VMIB SYS SPD Call will continue to be routed based on programmed destinations Admin PGM191 FLEX8 Pick Up Group 1 Auto Pick Up Group ON OFF OFF Designates if Auto Pick Up is available by pressing MON button 2 All Group Member Ringing ON OFF OFF Incoming calls to member ring at all Group Stations SMDR LOCAL CODE TABLE PGM FLEX ITEM SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 204 1 4 Local Code Up to 5 digits ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 28 LCR TABLE ASSIGNMENT PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 LCR Access Mode M00 M01 M02 M11 M12 M13 M00 Disable Determines LCR access mode 2 Set the Day of Week Zone 1234567 MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY SUNDAY 1 3 1 Each day can use a different LCR setting and can be grouped in up to three zones 3 Set the Time Zone of Day Zone 1 Time Zone1 00 24 0024 Time Zone2 00 24 Time Zone3 00 24 Each day zone can use a different LCR setting and can be grouped in up to three zones 4 Set the Time Zone of Day Zone2 Time Zone1 00 24 0024 Time Zone2 00 24 Time Zone3 Each day zone can use a different LCR setting and can be grouped in up to three zones 5 Set the Time Zone of D
98. 37 424 2 Long ACO 00 63 42 SAF Only ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 88 3 10 2 Initialization PGM 450 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Initialization 1 Flexible Numbering Plan Initialization PGM105 PGM106 PGM107 2 Station Database Initialization PGM110 PGM111 PGM112 PFM113 PGM114 PGM116 PGM117 PGM118 PGM119 PGM121 PGM122 PGM123 PGM124 PGM179 3 CO Line Database Initialization PGM140 PGM141 GM142 PGM143 PGM144 4 System Feature Database Initialization PGM160 PGM177 PGM108 5 Station Group Database Initialization PGM190 PGM191 7 Reserved None Reserved 8 System Timer Database Initialization PGM180 PGM182 9 Toll Table Database Initialization PGM224 PGM225 10 LCR Database Initialization PGM220 PGM222 11 Tables Initialization PGM227 PGM229 PGM232 PGM229 12 Flexible Button Program Initialization PGM115 14 All Database Initialization Above All 15 System Reset By Software 16 DID RERT Table Reroute DEST of PGM 231 450 17 Board Data PGM 340 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 89 3 10 3 Print Port Database PGM 451 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Print Port Data 1 Flexible Numbering Plan Print 2 Station Database Print STN_R 3 CO Line Database Print CO_R 4 System Feature
99. 6 A 26 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 4 VMIB Announce 2 Location 00 70 2 Digits 00 Not Assigned VMIB Announcement played when 2nd timer expires 5 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 3 Digits 000 Sec VMIB Announcement re played when timer expires Admin PGM191 FLEX5 FLEX6 6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat E D ON OFF OFF Determines if VMIB Announce 2 Repeat is available 7 Overflow Destination STA HUNT VMIB SYS SPD Call will continue to be routed based on programmed destinations Admin PGM191 FLEX8 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 3 Digits 180 Sec Determines time delay call will be routed to Overflow Destination Admin PGM191 FLEX7 9 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 3 Digits 002 Sec Determines time a Station will be maintained in a Busy state after disconnecting a call and placing an outgoing call 10 Alternative If No Member ON OFF OFF Determines time delay before call is rerouted on No Answer 11 Music Source 00 08 2 digits 00 Not Assigned Calls to Hunt Group members will be processed as for the Group 12 ACD Warning Tone Destination ON OFF ON Determines if ACD Warning Tone is available 13 Alternate Destination STA Hunt Determines reroute destination when all members are busy 14 Supervisor Timer 000 999 3 digits 030 Sec Displays queued calls on Supervisor s LCD Admin PGM191 FLEX14 15 Supervisor Call Count 00 99 2 Digits 00 Triggers
100. 6 To deactivate a Conference Room DISA call perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 44 the Conference Room number 1 9 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button To join a Conference Room internal call perform the following 1 Dial the activated Conference Room number 571 579 2 Enter the 5 digit password if applicable optional To join a Conference Room DISA call perform the following 1 DISA call is routed to the conference room To transfer a CO call to a Conference Room perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button from the Attendant Station 2 Dial the activated Conference Room number 571 579 3 Dial the 5 digit password if applicable optional To check a Conference Room status from the Attendant Station 1 From the Attendant Station dial a Conference Room Status code and press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 047 the Attendant LCD will show the Station that activated the Conference Room members and other data related to the Conference Room Condition Up to 9 Conference Rooms can be activated on the System Up to a maximum of 15 members can enter each Conference Room Assigning and entering passwords is optional Conference Room status can be checked by the Attendant An LCO line cannot be a member of a Conference Room If the System Attendant has a Conference Room button the status of Conference Rooms can be checked via the LED
101. 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel a Wake Up alarm from the Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 043 3 Dial the Station range that was to be alerted if a singe Station was to receive the alarm enter the key instead of a second Station 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes To register a Wake Up alarm from a Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 041 3 Dial the desired time the alarm should alert 2 digit hour and minute 24 hour mode 4 Press the key to have the alarm alert once only 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel a Wake Up time from a Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 042 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes 64 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition If a Wake Up alarm is registered at a Station a symbol is displayed in front of the present time on the LCD If VMIB is installed the voice message for the Wake Up time is heard 3 times and then MOH is heard If the Wake Up ring is not answered after 3 times it is cancelled If the System Attendant dials to the wake up fail Station and erase the Wake up Fail Ring PGM182 FLEX7 the Fail Ring will disappear following the confirmation tone when the Wake Up Fail Ring timer expir
102. 70 T 81 U 82 V 83 8 80 W 91 X 92 Y 93 Z 9 9 90 1 Blank 2 3 0 00 FIGURE 2 4 1 1 KEYSET MAP 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button the confirmation tone should be heard To program Custom Messages 11 20 from the System Attendant or Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 053 and the message number desired 11 20 3 Enter the message refer to Figure 2 4 1 1 up to 24 characters 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button the confirmation tone should be heard 40 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To activate LCD Messages custom pre selected from a Station or from the System Attendant perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 51 3 Dial the desired message number 00 or 11 20 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button the confirmation tone should be heard To cancel LCD Messages custom pre selected from a Station perform the following 1 Press the flashing DND FOR button OR 2 Press the TRANS PGM button 3 Dial 51 and the desired message number 11 20 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel LCD Messages custom pre selected from the System Attendant perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 052 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button Reference D Attendant Service 2 13 Admin Programming R
103. 8 REMARK 3 UCD DND 568 568 568 568 698 568 68 568 4 Night Answer 569 569 577 2 699 569 69 569 5 Call Parking Location 601 608 601 608 601 608 601 608 601 608 601 608 601 608 601 608 6 Direct Call Pickup 7 7 7 42 7 7 7 7 7 CO Line Group Access 8xx 8xx 8xx 4xx 8xx 8xx 8xx 8xx 88xx 88xx 88xx 48xx 88xx 88xx 88xx 88xx 9 Tie Routing Access 10 Retrieve Held CO Line 8 8 8 4 8 8 8 8 11 Retrieve Held Individual CO Line 8 xx 8 xx 8 xx 4 xx 8 xx 8 xx 8 xx 8 xx 12 Access CO Line in the 1st Available CO Line Group 9 9 9 1 0 9 9 0 13 Attendant Call 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 9 14 1st Door Open 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 2nd Door Open 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 16 3rd Door Open 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 17 4th Door Open 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 18 VM Message Waiting Enable 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 Conference Room 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 2 SLT Conference Page Join 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 109 3 Unsupervised Conference Timer Extend ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 10 IP Settings PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 IP Name Max 15 Digits 2 Server IP Address 12 Digits 192 168 1 1 3 CLI IP Address 12 Dig
104. 81 FLEX8 VMIB Message Rewind Timer PGM 181 FLEX17 104 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 11 3 Two Way Recording 2 11 3 1 Two Way Recording Using SMDI Description Allows a Station to record a conversation in the mailbox by pressing the RECORD button while the Station is talking with a CO party Operation To program a flexible button as the RECORD button for 2 way recording perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 54 record code 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button To record a conversation while on a call with a CO Line caller perform the following 1 Press the RECORD button to record the conversation to the User s mailbox the System will send a SMDI message to Voice Mail PC through RS 232C cable The format is as shown gt crlfMD0010mmmmH0xxxxxxxxxbbcrlf Y cr carriage return lf line feed mmmm VM port number H Action code for recording xxxxxxxxx extension which try to record b ascii space To cancel recording perform the following 1 While recording a call press the RECORD button again OR 2 Hang up to cancel recording Condition While the recording feature is enabled the RECORD button will flash at 240ipm and if it is disabled the RECORD button will be extingui
105. ANS PGM button 2 Dial 169 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 169 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS LCD Time Display Mode Two LCD Time formats are available Ordinary 12 hr and Military 24 hr mode FLEX1 0 24 Hr HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 ORDINARY 1 MILITARY LCD Date Display Mode Two LCD date formats are available Day Month Year DDMMYY or Month Day Year MMDDYY mode FLEX1 1 MMDDYY HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 DDMMYY 1 MMDDYY LCD Language Display Mode A choice of 16 LCD language formats can be selected FLEX1 VALUE Range 00 15 HOLD SAVE VALUES 00 English 01 Italian 02 Finnish 03 Dutch 04 Swedish 05 Danish 06 Norwegian 07 Hebrew 08 German 09 Portuguese 11 Spanish 12 Korean 13 Estonian 14 Russian 15 Turkish ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 41 3 3 11 Modem Assignment PGM 170 Modem service is available only when a MODU is installed on the MPB In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 170 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 170 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS STA No To use modem line flexibility one Station should be assigned to the Modem Incoming CO Calls will be connected to the modem when the Modem Station receives a call FLEX1 Station Number Range
106. Assignment Not Assigned Press FLEX button and enter each Station number being assigned to the Group OR Press FLEX button and enter first and last Station numbers being assigned ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 25 Station Group Program PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Circular Group Terminal Group 1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000 999 3 Digits 015 Sec VMIB Announcement played on No Answer Admin PGM191 FLEX3 2 VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000 999 3 Digits 000 Sec 2nd VMIB Announcement played on No Answer Admin PGM191 FLEX4 3 VMIB Announce 1 Location 00 70 2 Digits 00 Not Assigned VMIB Announcement played when timer expires 4 VMIB Announce 2 Location 00 70 2 Digits 00 Not Assigned VMIB Announcement played when 2nd timer expires 5 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 3 Digits 000 Sec Not Assigned VMIB Announcement re played when timer expires Admin PGM191 FLEX5 FLEX6 6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat E D ON OFF OFF Determines if VMIB Announce 2 Repeat is available 7 Overflow Destination STA HUNT VMIB SYS SPD Call will continue to be routed based on programmed destinations Admin PGM191 FLEX8 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 3 Digits 180 Sec Determines time delay call will be routed to Overflow Destination Admin PGM191 FLEX7 9 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 3 Digits 002 Sec Determines time a Station w
107. Assignment PGM 120 FLEX1 Attendant Call Queuing RBT MOH PGM 160 FLEX1 2 13 3 Attendant Forward Description The Attendant can Forward Unconditional Call Forward a call to another Station refer to Ref A The Forwarded to Station will substitute for the Attendant temporarily while the Attendant is in the Forwarding state Figure 2 13 3 illustrates the Attendant Forward feature unconditional call attendant FIGURE 2 13 3 ATTENDANT FORWARD Operation The Attendant Forward feature operates similarly to Unconditional Call Forward To activate Attendant Forward perform the following Steps 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial 1 call forward code 4 Dial the Forwarded to Station number 5 Go on hook by replacing the Handset To deactivate the Attendant Forward perform the following Steps 1 In an idle state press the DND FOR button 2 In an off hook state press the DND FOR button and press the key Condition If the Attendant assigns and Attendant Forward Unconditional Call Forward to an SLT or WHTU the forwarded to Station will only serve incoming calls Attendant calls Attendant recalls etc The forwarded to SLT or WHTU Station cannot activate other Attendant features Reference A Unconditional Call Forward 2 3 1 116 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006
108. CEDURE COMMENTS Assign SLT MOH To assign SLT MOH set the value and match the SLT Station number for the SLT port FLEX4 FLEX1 refer to VALUES SLT Station Number HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 SLT MOH 1 FLEX2 SLT MOH 2 FLEX3 SLT MOH 3 FLEX4 SLT MOH 4 FLEX5 SLT MOH 5 Dial Tone Source To assign an external dial tone set the SLT Station Number of the SLT port FLEX5 SLT MOH refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 SLT MOH 1 2 SLT MOH 2 3 SLT MOH 3 4 SLT MOH 4 5 SLT MOH 5 ICM Ring Back Tone RBT To assign an external ICM RBT set the SLT Station number of the SLT port FLEX6 SLT MOH refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 SLT MOH 1 2 SLT MOH 2 3 SLT MOH 3 4 SLT MOH 4 5 SLT MOH 5 CO Ring Back Tone RBT To assign external DID ring back tone set the SLT Station number of the SLT port FLEX7 SLT MOH refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 SLT MOH 1 2 SLT MOH 2 3 SLT MOH 3 4 SLT MOH 4 5 SLT MOH 5 INT MOH Type System provides 13 kinds of Internal MOH types FLEX8 refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 ROMANCE 1 TURKISH MARCH 2 GREENSLEEVES2 3 FUR ELISE 4 CARMEN TOREADOR SONG 5 WALTZ OF THE FLOWERS 6 PAVANE 7 SICHILLAND 8 MOZART PIANO SONATA 9 SONG OF SPRING 10 LA CAMPANELLA 11 OVERTURE NO 2 BADINERIE 12 BLUE DANUBE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming
109. CID Mode Select The User can select the CID type FLEX1 VALUE 1 digit Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 DISABLE 1 FSK MODE 2 RUSSIA CID MODE 3 AUTO MODE CID Name Display The Analog CO Line CLI carries the caller s telephone number or name toggle FLEX2 1 NAME HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 TELEPHONE No 1 NAME Russia CID Detect Mode Determines which calls will have Cid detections FLEX3 1 ALL HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 LOCAL 1 ALL Russia Cid Request Determines if CID is User Request or Auto FLEX4 1 AUTO VALUES 0 USER 1 AUTO Russia CID Request Timer Russia CID Request Timer FLEX5 VALUE 10msec Range 010 150 HOLD SAVE Russia CID VIRAN Timer When the System automatically answers a CO Ring for Russia CID detection the timer is initialized call will be dropped on timer expiration FLEX6 VALUE 1sec Range 001 300 HOLD SAVE Russia CID Digit Number Determines the number of valid CID received digits FLEX7 VALUE 2 digits Range 04 10 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 30 3 3 System Data PGM 160 185 3 3 1 System Attributes I PGM 160 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 160 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 160 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Attendant Call Qu
110. COB RESERV 00 63 7 ACOB RESERV 8 ACOB VMIB 00 63 37 9 ACOB DTMF 00 63 37 10 ACOB TONE 00 63 37 11 ACOB MUSIC1 00 63 37 12 ACOB MUSIC2 00 63 13 ACOB RESERV 404 14 ACOB MODEM 00 63 37 VMIB RX Gain 1 VMIB DKT 00 63 21 2 VMIB SLT 00 63 21 3 VMIB RESERV 00 63 21 4 VMIB RESERV 00 63 26 5 VMIB ACO 00 63 23 6 VMIB RESERV 7 VMIB RESERV 8 VMIB MUSIC1 00 63 32 407 9 VMIB MUSIC2 00 63 32 DTMF RC Gain 1 DTMF SLT 00 63 17 2 DTMF RESERV 3 DTMF ACO 00 63 15 4 DTMF RESERV 408 5 DTMF RESERV EXT PAGE Gain 1 EXT PAGE DKT 00 63 26 2 EXT PAGE SLT 00 63 26 3 EXT PAGE RESERV 409 4 EXT PAGE RESERV ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 32 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 5 EXT PAGE ACO 00 63 28 6 EXT PAGE RESERV 7 EXT PAGE RESERV 8 EXT PAGE VMIB 00 63 37 9 EXT PAGE MUSIC1 00 63 37 10 EXT PAGE RESERV 11 EXT PAGE RESERV CPT Gain 00 63 24 1 CPT ACO 00 63 15 2 CPT RESERV 410 3 CPT RESERV MODEM Gain 1 MODEM ACO 00 63 20 2 MODEM RESERV 00 63 20 411 3 MODEM RESERV Short SLIB Gain 1 Short ACO 00 63 32 412 2 Long ACO 00 63 32 SAF Only Long SLIB Gain 1 Short ACO 00 63 40 413 2 Long ACO 00 63 40 SAF Only Far SLIB Gain 1 Short ACO 00 63 44 414 2 Long ACO 00 63 44
111. D SAVE VALUES 0 NO System 1 YES PBX PABX CO Error Tone If this value is set to YES PBX or PABX provides a CO Error Tone otherwise the LDK system provides it FLEX9 1 YES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 NO System 1 YES PBX PABX CO Busy Tone If this value is set to YES PBX or PABX provides a CO Busy Tone otherwise the LDK system provides it FLEX10 1 YES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 NO System 1 YES PBX PABX CO Announce Tone If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides a CO Announce Tone otherwise the LDK system provides it FLEX11 1 YES HOLD SAVE VALUES Default 0 0 NO 1 YES CO Flash Timer Designates the length of time limit for CO Flash CO Flashing is available within this timer otherwise the CO Line is released FLEX12 010 100msec Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE Open Loop Detect Timer Designates the time limit for CO Open Loop FLEX13 010 100msec Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE Line Length Used to determine the line length when the CO Line length is too variable SAF only FLEX14 1 LONG HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 SHORT 1 LONG DISA Answer Timer System answers DISA call after this time FLEX15 VALUE 1 digit Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE DISA Delay Timer This timer is used to delay the connection of the DTMF receiver after the DISA line answers FLEX16 VALUE 1 digit Range 1 9 HOLD
112. Database Print 5 Station Group Database Print 7 System Timer Database Print 8 Toll Table Database Print 9 LCR Database Print 10 Other Tables Print 11 Nation Specific Database Print 12 Flexible Button Program Print STN_R 14 All Database Print 15 LCD Message Print 1 Language 00 12 Nation Specific 00 ENG 01 ITA 02 FIN 03 DUT 04 SWE 05 DAN 06 NOR 07 HUN 08 GER 09 FRE 10 POR 11 SPA 12 KOR 2 Station Type 0 2 0 0 NORMAL 1 LG GAP 2 LARGE 451 16 Quit Print ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 1 A ADMIN PROGRAMMING TABLES Numbering Plan The following numbering plan can be changed by Admin Programming 104 107 depending on the user s needs To enter user programming mode press the TRANS PGM button on the keyset or dial 563 on a SLT FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN FUNCTION CODE ITEM REMARK 100 151 Intercom Call 620 629 Group Pilot Number 501 510 Internal Page Number 543 Internal All Call Page 544 Meet Me Page 545 External Page Zone 549 All Call Page INT amp ENT 550 SMDR Account Code Enter SLT 551 Flash Command to CO Line SLT 552 Last Number Redial SLT 553 DND Toggle ON OFF SLT 554 Call Forward SLT 555 Speed Dial Programming SLT 556 Message Wait Callback Enable SLT 557 Message Wait Callback Return SLT 558 Speed Dial Access SLT 559 Cancel DND FWD Pre MSG SLT 56
113. Determines if VMIB Announce 2 Repeat is available 7 Overflow Destination STA HUNT VMIB SYS SPD Call will continue to be routed based on programmed destinations Admin PGM191 FLEX8 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 3 Digits 180 Sec Determines time delay call will be routed to Overflow Destination Admin PGM191 FLEX7 9 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 3 Digits 002 Sec Determines time a Station will be maintained in a Busy state after disconnecting a call and placing an outgoing call 10 Music Source 00 08 2 digits 00 Not Assigned Calls to Hunt Group members will be processed as for the Group 11 Maximum Queue Call Count 00 99 99 Determines maximum amount of queued calls allowed for the Group calls received after max is attained will be disconnected 12 Supervisor Station Determines the Attendant Station 13 Hunt Member Forward Determines if Station will receive Hunt calls 14 Queue Count Display ON OFF ON Determines if the Queue call count will be displayed on the LCD VM Group 1 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 3 Digits 002 Sec Determines time a Station will be maintained in a Busy state after disconnecting a call and placing an outgoing call 2 Put Mail Index 1 4 1 Voice Mail dialing table 3 Get Mail Index 1 4 2 Voice Mail dialing table 4 Hunt Type Circular Terminal Terminal Sets Hunt Group Type 5 SMDI Port Needs to be programmed 6 Overflow Timer 000 600
114. E Get Mail Index One of the VM dialing tables FLEX3 VALUE Range 1 4 HOLD SAVE Hunt Type Used to set the Hunt Group type for VM members FLEX4 1 Circular HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 Circular 2 Terminal SMDI Port The Simplified Message Desk Interface SMDI dictates the distribution of VM information Does not need to be programmed Overflow Timer If the timer expires after a call is received in the Group the call will be routed to the Overflow Destination FLEX6 Seconds Range 000 600 HOLD SAVE Overflow Destination Calls to a Station in the Group will continue to route until answered or each Station in the Group has been tried The call will remain at the last Station in the Group or will be passed to the overflow Station Group VMIB System Speed Bin after the Overflow Timer expires FLEX7 Destination Type Refer to Values Range 1 4 HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 Station 2 Hunt 3 VMIB 00 70 00 Not Assigned 4 System Speed 2000 2499 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 67 SMDI PORT FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Off line SMDR Statistics Print 01 12 COM1 2 Admin Port 01 12 COM1 3 Traffic 01 12 COM1 4 SMDI Print 01 12 COM1 5 Call Information 01 12 COM1 6 Info Online SMDR 01 12 COM1 7 Trace 01 12 COM1 8 Debug 01 12 COM1 9 PC Admin 01 12 NET PCADM 10 PC Atte
115. E DEFAULT REMARK 1 Station COS Day 1 9 7 Day Class of Service 116 2 Station COS Night 1 9 7 Night Weekend Class of Service 117 CO Group Line 1 8 Toggle 118 Internal Page Zone Access 01 05 Toggle 1 Each Station can be assigned to an Internal Page Zone 119 1 5 Conference Page Zone Access 06 10 Each Station can be assigned to a Conference Page Zone ICM Tenancy Group Number 1 ICM Tenancy Group Attendant STA No Day Night Mode set by the Attendant 120 2 ICM Tenancy Access Group 01 05 01 Can be programmed to allow or deny calls to other Groups ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 14 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 121 ICM Preset Call Forward Calls will be forwarded to designated Station on No Answer Idle Line Selection Hot and Warm Line Destination 1 FLEX Button 01 44 Program one touch feature access 2 CO Line 01 12 One touch CO Line access 3 CO Line Group 01 08 One touch CO Line Group access 122 4 Station 10 57 One touch access to another Station 124 SMDR Account Group Assign 00 23 00 Not Assigned Stations can be assigned to one SMDR Account Group Copy DSS Button 01 05 Copy DSS Button to another Station 1 Copy DSS from Station Copy DSS Button from another Station 125 2 Copy DSS from ICM Group Copy DSS Button from ICM Group 126 Station IP List 01 52 Display Station Nu
116. EX10 Music Source refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 Not assigned by this field 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 RESERVED 4 8 SLT MOH Max Queue Count The maximum amount of calls that can be queued If the total queue count is achieved the next call into the queuing will be disconnected FLEX11 Seconds Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE VMIB Supervisor Used to set the VMIB Supervisor Station number FLEX12 Station Number Range 100 125 HOLD SAVE Member Forward If this value is set to ON the Hunt Member cannot receive Hunt Group calls FLEX13 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Queue Count Display If this value is set to ON the Hunt Member can check the Queue Count FLEX14 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 66 3 5 5 VM Group Attribute If the Hunt Group type selected is VM Group the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 191 3 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Wrap up Timer Designates the amount of time a call will be held in a busy state following expiration of the timer FLEX1 Seconds Range 002 999 HOLD SAVE Put Mail Index One of the VM dialing tables FLEX2 VALUE Range 1 4 HOLD SAV
117. EX4 CO Line Group Change FLEX5 ALT Change FLEX6 All LCR Database Initialize ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 74 PGM 223 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Alternative DMT Index Changes all Alternative DMT Index values of DMT entry to the new value FLEX5 VALUE 6 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Day Zone1 FLEX2 Day Zone2 FLEX3 Day Zone3 FLEX4 CO Line Group Change FLEX5 ALT Change FLEX6 All LCR Database Initialize Initialize All LCR Initializes the all LCR Admin data to the default value FLEX6 HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Day Zone1 FLEX2 Day Zone2 FLEX3 Day Zone3 FLEX4 CO Line Group Change FLEX5 ALT Change FLEX6 All LCR Database Initialize ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 75 3 8 Toll Table PGM 224 226 Toll tables are used for accessing certain toll free calls as well as not allowing certain calls for Stations assigned to a particular Station COS 3 8 1 Toll Exception Table PGM 224 The Allow Deny Tables are organized into 2 sets of tables to support 2 different toll plans at one installed site Each allow deny table may contain up to 30 number strings All bins of allow and deny tables have no default entries Each number string can contain up to 14 entries including any number 0 9 and Don t Care The following rules should be remembered when setting u
118. Enter the appropriate Station Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 125 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Copy DSS from Station FLEX1 Station Number HOLD SAVE Copy DSS Button The assigned DSS button can be copied to another Station or ICM group Copy DSS from ICM Group FLEX2 ICM Group Range 1 5 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default CONF button 3 1 15 Station IP List PGM 126 In this program mode the following items can be customized 5 Press the TRANS PGM button 6 Dial 126 7 Enter the appropriate Station bin number 8 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 126 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Station IP List The IP Address can be programmed for each Station This IP Address is used to support first CTI through the LAN First CTI IP Address 12 digits HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 21 3 1 16 Display Station Number PGM 130 131 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial PGM Number 130 or 131 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Show Station by assigned Day COS FLEX1 1 COS Range 1 7 Display Station Number by COS PGM 130 The LCD will show the Stations of a designated Class of Service COS Show Station by assigned Ni
119. FLEX1 FLEX3 FLEX1 Determines routing of incoming DISA calls on Busy Tone Attendant Hunt 2 Error Destination FLEX1 FLEX3 FLEX1 Determines routing of incoming DISA calls when error is made Tone Attendant Hunt 167 3 No Answer Destination FLEX1 FLEX3 FLEX1 Determines routing of incoming DISA calls on No Answer Tone Attendant Hunt ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 19 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Prompt Usage FLEX1 FLEX5 FLEX1 Determines if VMIB Announcement is played prior to call being routed Busy Prompt Usage ON OFF ON Determines if Busy Announcement is played before call is routed to Busy Destination Error Prompt Usage ON OFF ON Determines if Error Announcement is played before call is routed to Error Destination DND Prompt Usage ON OFF ON Determines if Busy Announcement is played before call is routed to Busy Destination No answer Prompt Usage ON OFF ON Determines if No Answer Announcement is played before call is routed to No Answer Destination 4 Attendant Transfer Prompt Usage ON OFF ON Determines if Attendant Transfer is played before call is routed to the Attendant 5 Reroute Busy Destination FLEX1 FLEX3 FLEX1 Determines if call is rerouted on Busy or No Answer Tone Attendant Hunt 6 Reroute Error Destination FLEX1 FLEX3 FLEX1 Determines if call is rerouted to the Busy Destination on N
120. GM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 7 CO Ring Back Tone 0 5 0 Not Assigned Determines if the external DID ring back tone will be used 8 Internal MOH Type 0 12 0 Romance Determines the MOH type 172 1 4 PBX Access Code Max 2 Digits Not Assigned Up to 4 PABX Access Codes can be assigned PLA Priority Setting 1 Transfer CO 1 2 Recalling CO 2 3 Incoming CO 3 173 4 Queued CO 1 4 4 RS 232 Port Setting Assigned to COM1 Port COM2 Port MODU 1 Baud Rate 0 7 6 0 UNKNOWN 1 UNKNOWN 2 1200 Baud 3 2400 Baud 4 4800 Baud 5 9600 Baud 6 19200 Baud 7 38400 Baud 2 CTS RTS ON OFF OFF 3 P Break ON OFF OFF 174 4 LPP 001 199 060 1 Off Line SMDR Statistics Print 2 Admin Data When Admin 451 is used 3 Traffic Print Traffic Analysis print 4 SMDI Print 5 Call Info Print 6 On Line SMDR Print 7 Trace Print 8 Debug Print COM1 01 9 PC_ Admin NET_PCA DM PC_ Admin connection 10 PC_ Attendant NET_PCA TD PC_ Attendant connection 11 CTI NET_CTI CTI connection 175 12 Remote_ Diagnostic 01 11 NET_REM OTE Not Supported 176 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio 66 33 60 40 50 50 66 33 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio is set for 10PPS SMDR Attributes 1 14 ALL Station Message Detail Recording ALL CALL incoming outgoing and outgoing local and long distance call information is all recorded in the database 1 SMDR S
121. HO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 14 Intercom Tenancy Group Description A Station can be assigned to one of the Intercom Tenancy Groups Each Intercom Tenancy Group can be operated independently and Stations in the Group can be assigned an individual CO Group to use A maximum of 5 Intercom Tenancy Groups can be assigned Each Group can be assigned by the Attendant and can be programmed to allow or deny calls to other Groups Stations in a Group are allowed access to other Stations based on the allow access of the calling Group FLEX DEFAULT RANGE REMARK 1 Station Number Attendant Station of assigned Intercom Tenancy Group 2 Group 01 FLEX1 5 Intercom Tenancy Groups allow access for the assigned Groups When a call to another Intercom Tenancy Group is allowed CO Line or Station calls Pick Up and Transfer features are activated Condition When a call to another Intercom Tenancy Group is denied Call Pick Up cannot be activated It is not allowed for Stations to have the same Station numbers regardless of if they belong to different Intercom Tenancy Groups The Attendant of an Intercom Tenancy Group can be any Station in the System and it is not affected by Intercom Tenancy Group access When the Attendant of an Intercom Tenancy Group sets the Day Night Weekend mode it will affect only their assigned Intercom tenancy Group Reference A Pick Up 2 3 4 Admin
122. HOLD SAVE button 5 The User database will be saved and the Station will return to the dummy state Condition A dummy station will display DUMMY STATION x x x x x x the physical Station number A dummy station only allows login operation all other operations are not allowed Logout operation is only allowed for dummy stations where a user has logged in Total number of Users is restricted by the system Station capacity the total number of hot desk users is the same as the total number of Stations ex 48 including SO port and two dummy ports A hot desk User must have their own password 67 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Saved User database information includes Station Number Station Attributes PGM 111 124 CO Routing Ring Assign Hunt Group Membership Voice Mail If the User tries to log in at another Station without logging out of a dummy Station the previous used Station will return to the dummy state automatically The hot desk will automatically log off if there is no activity at the DKTU within the Auto Log Out timer The button map of the hot desk will not be changed even tough a User logs on to a different type of DKTU it is recommended that the same type of DKTU is used for the Hot Desk Station Only DKTU s with more than 12 buttons and WKT s can be used as dummy stations The modern associated with the
123. HT HUNT GROUP Range 620 629 HOLD SAVE Ring Assignment to VMIB Announcement Used to assign ringing at a Station during Weekend Mode FLEX3 3 WEEKEND VOICE MESSAGE Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 28 3 2 5 CO Line Assignment Display PGM 145 In this program mode the following items can be customized 5 Press the TRANS PGM button 6 Dial 145 7 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 8 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 145 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS CO Line Assignment Display Used to check the Ring Assignment destination of a CO Line for each Day Night Ring Mode If CO calls are assigned to the Station during Day or Night Mode the delay value can be viewed ex value 100 1 means Station 100 will receive a ring with a delay value of 1 NOTE when there are too many stations to see you can scroll data using the volume up down keys FLEX1 HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 DAY FLEX2 NIGHT FLEX3 WEEKEND FLEX4 ON DEMAND ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 29 3 2 6 CO to CID Attributes PGM 147 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 147 3 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 147 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS
124. I 10 NET_REMOTE In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 175 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 175 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Off Line SMDR Statistics Print Off Line SMDR data can be printed through this data port FLEX1 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE ADMIN Data When ADMIN 451 is used the Admin data can be printed through this port FLEX2 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE Traffic Traffic Analysis data can be printed through this port FLEX3 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE SMDI Print SMDI data can be printed through this port FLEX4 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 46 PGM 175 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Call Information Call information data can be printed through this port FLEX5 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE Info On line SMDR On line SMDR data can be printed through this port FLEX6 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE Trace Trace data ca be printed through this port FLEX7 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE Debug Debug data can be printed through this port FLEX8 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE PC Admin PC Admin can be printed through this port FLEX9 VALUE Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE CTI CTI can be printed through this port FLEX10 VALUE Range 1 11
125. M RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 2 CO Line Name Assign Max 12 Characters 3 Metering Unit 00 06 00 Unit used to recognize Pulse from CO Line 4 Line Drop Using DPT ON OFF OFF Incoming calls checked by CPT and dropped if dial tone is detected 5 CO Distinct Ring 0 4 0 Determines if distinct Ring Tones will be detected on incoming calls Ring Tones Programmable at Admin 422 6 CO Line MOH 0 9 1 7 PABX CO Dial Tone YES NO YES Determines if PX PABX or LDK System provides CO DialTone 8 PABX CO Ring Back Tone YES NO NO Determines if PX PABX or LDK System provides CO Ring Back Tone 9 PABX CO Error Tone YES NO NO Determines if PX PABX or LDK System provides CO Error Tone 10 PABX CO Busy Tone YES NO NO Determines if PX PABX or LDK System provides CO Busy Tone 11 PABX CO Announce Tone YES NO NO Determines if PX PABX or LDK System provides CO Announce 12 CO Flash Timer 000 300 050 Determines CO Line Flash length 10msec base 13 Open Loop Detect Timer 0 20 0 Determines CO Open Loop length 100msec base 14 Line Length LONG SHORT SHORT SAF Only 15 DISA Answer Timer 1 9 5 Determines the length before System answers DISA calls India CIS Only 16 DISA Delay Timer 1 9 2 Determines the length of time before the call is connected following answer of a DISA call CIS Only CO Ring Assignment 1 Day 2 Night 3 Weekend 144 4 On Demand STA_R HUNT
126. M 184 If Chime Bell Activate Station press Chime Bell button Chime Bell Receive Station starts to ring The ring stops when Chime Bell Timer expires In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 184 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 184 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Chime Bell Station Pair Former station is a Chime Bell Activate Station and later station is a Chime Bell Receive Station FLEX1 Bin Number 01 14 Station Pair HOLD SAVE Chime Bell Relay If Chime Bell Relay is assigned the external relay makes signal at the same time like Loud Bell Control FLEX2 Bin Number 2 digits Range 01 14 Relay number 1digit Range 1 2 HOLD SAVE Bell Timer Chime Bell Receive Station receives Chime bell ring until this timer expires FLEX3 Value 2digits Range 01 20seconds HOLD SAVE Bell Frequency Chime Bell Frequency can be adjusted by this feature FLEX4 FLEX1 FLEX2 Value 2digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 57 3 5 Station Group PGM 190 191 3 5 1 Station Group Assignment PGM 190 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 190 3 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 190 DESCRIP
127. M 222 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 221 3 Enter the appropriate VALUE Leading Digit Table Range 000 249 FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK VALUE FLEX1 FLEX2 LCR Type BOTH BOTH INT and COL INT internal dialing COL 3 way toggle FLEX2 FLEX3 LCR Code up to 12 digits NONE To be compared with the dialed digits by a user FLEX3 FLEX4 DMT index for Day Zone1 FLEX4 FLEX5 DMT index for Day Zone2 FLEX5 FLEX6 DMT index for Day Zone3 NONE 6 digits Meaning of 6 digits each pair 2 digits is the index to the DMT for each time Zone 1 2 3 the SPEED button is used to validate the remaining index ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 71 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 221 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS LCR Type Used to select the LCR type FLEX1 VALUE2 LCR type refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE VALUES Value2 1 INT internal dialing 2 COL after dialing a CO access code 3 BOTH INT and COL LCR Code If digits dialed by the User are equal to the determined value the digits will be converted and a CO line will be secured according to DMT Admin PGM 222 FLEX2 VALUE2 2 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE DMT Index Used to set the table index DMT Admin PGM 222 of Day Zone2 Because Day Zone1 has 3 different time zones all thre
128. MBU software upgrade process 7 When the ROM file sending is finished in the PC ARIA SOHO will erase the previous ROM data and start to fill ARIA SOHO ROM area with the received ROM file Condition While upgrading process other features do not work in the system When the ARIA SOHO MBU software upgrade is finished without completing you can retry to upgrade by doing the whole process again If the ROM files you want to send are invalid ARIA SOHO MBU software upgrade will not be started 131 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 15 2 LAN Description The ARIA SOHO MBU software can be upgraded through LAN interface by LDK upgrade program in remote PC Operation To upgrade the LAN software perform the following Steps 1 Connect the LAN cable to the PC LAN card 2 Run LDK PC Upgrade program 3 Select the ARIA SOHO system to be upgraded and press OK button 4 Set the port type to TCP Connection And press the Select button 132 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 5 Enter the ARIA SOHO IP address path of the binary file and the password for upgrade And press the Next button 6 In the Next window press Start button You can see the ARIA SOHO MBU software upgrade process 7 When the ROM file sending is finished in the PC ARIA SOHO will
129. MIB is not installed on the System it is impossible to record System greetings and prompts and error tone will be presented If the User stops recording by pressing the MON button or going on hook the recorded message will be saved User will need to delete the recorded message to cancel recording To record or delete a message from the Attendant Station all the VMIB ports should be in the idle state 102 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 When a call is transferred to the Attendant the Transfer to Attendant prompt will be provided to the caller and the ring back tone will be heard after the announcement If there is no recorded greeting or prompt the corresponding tone will be heard Up to 800 User messages are available in VMIB It is possible to use only 100 messages for System greetings system greetings prompts VMIB MOH If the VMIB MOH is used as the source for System MOH a port of the VMIB should always be reserved for MOH Only 1 VMIB MOH can be recorded on a VMIB When the memory is full while recording a System greeting the recorded message before message full will be saved Station groups can have different system greetings When recording System greetings and prompts at the Attendant Station the will be saved at all VMIB in the System except for the VMIB MOH The User can record the VMIB MOH with system prompt message number 071 The Syste
130. Manual June 2006 Operation To answer a call ringing at another Station perform the following 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Dial the Direct Call Pick up code 7 refer to Ref A OR 3 Press the programmed DIRECT CALL PICK UP button 4 Dial the Intercom number of the ringing Station To assign a DIRECT CALL PICK UP flexible button perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the Flexible button to be assigned 3 Dial 7 Direct Call Pick up code 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition A CO LOOP or POOL button is required to pick up a CO Line call When several calls are queued at a Station or Hunt Group the pick up depends on the Pick up Priority PGM 173 Queued callback and private line cannot be picked up An intercom call cannot be picked up at a Station in Hold or Park mode When the same types of CO Lines are queued the first queued CO Line is picked up Direct Call Pick up is allowed within the Intercom Tenancy Group a Station cannot pick up any call to the Station which does not belong to the same Intercom Tenancy Group PGM 120 A Station can answer an intercom call placed to an ICM box using Directed Call Pick up Reference A Intercom Tenancy Group PGM 120 Admin Programming Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Direct Call Pick up Code PGM 107 FLEX6 PLA Priori
131. Manual June 2006 43 3 3 13 PBX Access code PGM 172 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 172 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 172 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS PBX Access Mode A maximum 4 PABX codes can be assigned A PABX access code is a 1 or 2 digit number FLEX1 FLEX1 FLEX4 9 1 or 2 digits Range 1 99 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default Not Assigned 3 3 14 PLA Priority Setting PGM 173 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 173 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 173 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS PLA Priority Setting PLA Priority is set exclusively for call handling in relation to Transferred calls XFER Recalled calls REC Incoming calls INC and Queued calls QUE The following priority is used QUE gt INC gt REC gt XFER FLEX1 4 FLEX2 3 FLEX3 2 FLEX4 1 HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 XFER 2 REC 3 INC 4 QUE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 44 3 3 15 RS 232C Port Setting PGM 174 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 174 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 174 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS RS 232C Port Setting Used to desi
132. N 132 2 15 3 Serial COM Port 134 2 15 4 Modem 136 III ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 1 1 IIN NTTRROODDU UCCTTIIOON N Thjs programming manual is designed to provide general system features and Admin Programming using a DKTU and PC for the ARIA SOHO System This manual contains the fol lowing sections 1 1 Manual Usage Section 2 Feature Description This section is a functional listing of features with the description and operation of each The structure is divided into 5 parts as listed Description explains the nature of the feature Operation describes how to use the feature Condition explains any requirements or constraints of the feature related to its configuration Reference lists related topic information to aid in understanding the feature Admin Programming to operate this feature the list of admin programming must be set ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 SSYYSSTTEEM M FFEEAATTU URREE 2 1 Incoming Call Pickup 2 1 1 Rin
133. NS PGM button 2 Dial 120 3 Enter the appropriate Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 120 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Intercom Tenancy Group Attendant Each ICM group may have one Attendant Day Night Mode for ICM is set by the ICM Group Attendant FLEX1 ICM Tenancy Group Attendant HOLD SAVE ICM Tenancy Group Access Each group can be programmed to allow or deny calls to other groups FLEX2 FLEX1 FLEX5 toggle refer to Table ICM Tenancy Group Attendant HOLD SAVE ICM TENANCY GROUP FLEX BUTTONS FLEX ITEM RANGE REMARK 1 Attendant STA No Attendant Station of assigned ICM Tenancy Group 2 Access Group FLEX1 5 ICM Tenancy Groups allow access to assigned groups 3 1 11 Intercom Preset Call Forward PGM 121 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 121 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 121 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Forward to Station 1 Station Station Number HOLD SAVE Intercom Preset Call Forward If the Station does not answer the incoming CO call within the Preset Call Forward timer then the call is forwarded to a preset destination Forward to Group 2 Hunt Group Hunt Group Number HOLD SAVE VALUES Default None 1 Station 2 Hunt Group ARIA SOH
134. O Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 19 3 1 12 Idle Line Selection PGM 122 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 122 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 122 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Idle Line Designates Hot Line or Warm Line 1 ITEM refer to Table Range 1 4 digits refer to Table HOLD SAVE IDLE LINE SELECTION FLEX BUTTONS DGT ITEM RANGE REMARK 1 FLEX 01 44 To activate a feature on a flexible button as if pressed 2 CO Line 01 08 To secure a CO Line 3 CO Line Group 00 08 To secure a CO Line Group 4 Station 10 57 To call another Station 3 1 13 SMDR Account Group PGM 124 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 124 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 124 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS SMDR Account Group Stations can be assigned as a member of a call account group on SMDR A Station belongs to only one Group 01 Account Group 00 23 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 20 3 1 14 Copy DSS Button PGM 125 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 125 3
135. OMMENTS Allow Table Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS5 and COS6 Station match with the allowed toll pass digits NOTE Allow Table A is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS5 or 6 FLEX1 VALUE Range 01 20 Allow Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 DND FOR HOLD SAVE VALUES DND FOR Don t Care Deny Table Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS5 and COS6 Station match with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Deny Table A is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS5 or 6 FLEX1 VALUE Range 01 20 Deny Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 DND FOR HOLD SAVE VALUES DND FOR Don t Care ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 78 3 8 3 Emergency Service Call PGM 226 The Emergency Code Table is used for Emergency Call Service All Stations regardless of COS can dial the emergency codes in this table In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 226 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 226 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Emergency Service Call Maximum of 10 emergency codes can be programmed Bin Number Range 1 10 VALUE max 14 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 79 3 9 Tables PGM 227 236 3 9
136. ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 31 PGM 160 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS External Night Ring If this value is set to ON when an incoming CO call is received an UNA service is activated the call will be sent to LBC1 FLEX7 0 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Hold Preference There are two types of Hold system Hold and Exclusive Hold If a call is held in System Hold any Station can retrieve the call in Exclusive Hold only the holding Station can retrieve the call FLEX8 0 EXCLUSIVE HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 EXCLUSIVE 1 SYSTEM Multi Line Conference If this value is set to ON conference with multiple CO lines is available FLEX9 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Print LCR Converted Digit If this value is set to ON LCR converted digits are displayed on the LCD with SMDR data otherwise the originally dialed digits are shown FLEX10 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Conference Warning Tone If this value is set to ON other members will hear a warning tone when a new member enters a conference FLEX11 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Off Net Prompt Usage If this value is set to ON the off net FLEX12 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Off net DTMF Tone If this value is set to ON the off ne
137. Operation The following values are associated with MOH 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 Reserved 4 8 SLT MOH 9 Hold Tone 55 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition Only 1 MOH channel is supported SLT ports connected with MOHU can provide MOH channels Reference A Hold 2 3 3 1 Admin Programming CO Line MOH PGM 142 FLEX6 MOH Type 2 PGM 171 FLEX2 2 4 16 1 SLT MOH Description When a CO Line is placed in the Hold State refer to Ref A the external party will hear music Operation To assign SLT MOH type perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Enter 171 3 Press FLEX4 and enter the Station number 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button 5 Press the TRANS PGM button 6 Press FLEX2 and enter the SLT MOH type 0 9 refer to values listed 0 Not assigned 4 8 SLT MOH 9 Hold Tone 7 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition SLT ports connected with MOHU can provide MOH channels Up to 5 SLT ports can be used as MOH channels To use a SLT port as a MOH channel assign the desired SLT port with the MOH channel and connect the MOHU to the SLT port Reference A Hold 2 3 3 1 Admin Programming CO Line MOH PGM 142 FLEX6 MOH Type PGM 171 FLEX2 Assign SLT MOH PGM 171 FLEX4 56 ARIA SOHO
138. Priority Line Answer ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE Determines incoming call priority 8 Prepaid Call ON OFF OFF Determines Station Prepaid call usage availability 9 Speed Dial Access ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE Determines System Speed Dial availability 10 Two Way Record ON OFF OFF Determines incoming and outgoing call recording availability 11 Fax Mode ON OFF OFF Determines single ring usage for Fax machines 12 Off Net Call Mode EXTERNA L ALL ALL Determines if calls can be forwarded Off Net and using ICM 13 UCD Group Service ON OFF OFF Determines call handling for UCD groups and Stations belonging to those groups 14 Ring Group Service ON OFF OFF Determines call handling for Ring groups and Stations belonging to those groups 15 Stop Camp On Tone ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Determines if Camp On Tone can be heard 112 16 Line Length SHORT LONG FAIR SHORT Determines the variable Line length SAF Only SHORT 0km LONG 0 3km FAR 3 7 5km ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 12 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 18 Block Back Call for SLT ON OFF OFF Blocks SLT recall 19 I Time Reset ON OFF OFF Incoming Call Restriction 20 STA Account ON OFF OFF Must use an Account Code to access CO Lines 21 CID Type 2 Service ON OFF OFF Not available in LKD 1248 22 Door Open ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Determines if Sta
139. Programming Intercom Group Number PGM 111 FLEX13 Intercom Tenancy Group PGM 120 53 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 15 Message Wait Call Back Description Message Wait and Call Back are described as Message Wait A Station User can notify another Station User that he wishes to talk to the User the notified User can return the call or a message left at the Station When responding to the Station the User can answer messages left at the Station in sequential order up to 5 messages Call Back A Station can initiate a Call Back request when calling a busy Station once that Station becomes idle the Station that left the Call Back request will be notified A Station with a Message Waiting can receive periodic audible reminders the tone is sent to Stations only while idle and is presented over the Speaker Operation To leave a message wait at an idle Station that does not answer or is in DND mode perform the following Steps 1 Press the CALLBK button a confirmation tone should be heard 2 The CALLBK button LED at the receiving Station will flash To answer a Message Wait perform the following Steps 1 Press the flashing CALLBK button 2 The Station that left the message will receive an Intercom Ring To leave a Call Back at a busy Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the CALLBK button when calling a busy Stat
140. Programming Mode To delete the ADMIN Password press the SPEED button Password 4 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default Not Assigned Ignore received digit bypass the digit 3 3 4 Alarm Attributes PM 163 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 163 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 163 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Alarm Enable If this value is set to ON alarm is available FLEX1 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Alarm Contact Type Designates if the Alarm Contact Type is open or closed FLEX2 0 OPEN HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OPEN 1 CLOSED Alarm Mode Designates if the Alarm Mode in use is Alarm or Door Bell FLEX3 0 DOOR BELL HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 DOOR BELL 1 ALARM Alarm Signal Mode If this value is set to REPEAT when activated the Alarm Signal will be repeated until the Alarm is reset FLEX4 0 ONCE HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 ONCE 1 REPEAT ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 36 3 3 5 Attendant Assignment PGM 164 A maximum of 5 Attendants can be assigned including the Main Attendant and System Attendant In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 164 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 164
141. ROUP 2 6 2 Circular Group Description In a Circular Hunt Group calls to a Station in the Group or pilot number will go to the Station or an idle Station in the Group If unavailable or unanswered in the hunt No Answer timer the call will be directed to the next Station in the Group The call will continue to route until each Station in the Group has been tried The call will remain at the last Station in the Group or will be passed to the assigned Overflow Destination A Circular Hunt Group can be assigned with a pilot number Hunt Group number and only calls to the pilot number will hunt 83 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 FIGURE 2 6 3 CIRCULAR GROUP 2 6 3 Ring Group Description CO LINE 2 CO LINE 1 STA110 STA111 STA112 STA113 STA114 STA115 Hunt Group Hunt Group Call 1st 2nd Call All the Stations in the Group simultaneously receive call ringing to the Hunt Group until one of the Stations answers the call If the call is not answered following expiration of the Overflow timer the call will be sent to an Overflow Destination if assigned CO LINE 2 CO LINE 1 STA110 STA111 STA112 STA113 STA114 STA115 Hunt Group Call 1st Hunt Group 2nd Call CO LINE 3 Hunt Group Call 3rd FIGURE 2 6 4 RING GROUP 84 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description
142. RV 00 63 411 3 MODEM RESERV Short SLIB Gain 1 Short ACO 00 63 32 412 2 Long ACO 00 63 32 SAF Only Long Gain 1 Short ACO 00 63 40 413 2 Long ACO 00 63 40 SAF Only Far SLIB Gain 1 Short ACO 00 63 44 414 2 Long ACO 00 63 44 SAF Only Short ACO Gain 1 Short SLIB 00 63 37 2 Long SLIB 00 63 46 3 Far SLIB 00 63 50 415 4 DTIB 00 63 26 SAF Only Long ACO Gain 1 Short SLIB 00 63 37 2 Long SLIB 00 63 46 416 3 Far SLIB 00 63 50 SAF Only ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 87 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 4 DTIB 00 63 32 System Tone Frequency 1 Dial Tone 4 digits 0400 0425 2 Ring Back Tone 4 digits 0400 0425 3 Busy Tone 4 digits 0400 0000 4 Error Tone 4 digits 0400 0000 420 5 Dummy Dial Tone 4 digits 0350 0440 Differential Ring Frequency 1 Ring 1 4 digits 1000 1020 2 Ring 2 4 digits 0890 0910 3 Ring 3 4 digits 1260 1280 421 4 Ring 4 4 digits 0800 0820 Distinct Ring Frequency 1 Ring 1 4 digits 0480 0000 2 Ring 2 4 digits 0400 0000 3 Ring 3 4 digits 0620 0000 422 4 Ring 4 4 digits 0770 0000 423 ACNR Tone Cadence 1 Ring Back Tone 0 255 050 100 2 Busy Tone 0 255 025 025 3 Error Tone 0 255 012 012 4 S Dial Tone 0 255 070 000 DTIB ACO Rx Gain 1 Short ACO 00 63
143. SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 27 3 2 4 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 When the CO Service Type ADMIN 140 is set to Normal the CO incoming calls are routed to the proper destination according to this assignment The destination can be a Station Hunt Group or VMIB announcement The Ring assignment is applied separately by Day Night Ring Mode by pressing FLEX 1 4 RING ASSIGNMENT TO STATION FLEX ITEM DEST TYPE DEFAULT 1 Day 2 Night 3 Weekend 4 On Demand TYPE 1 Station Range Delay TYPE 2 Hunt Group TYPE 3 Voice Message Station 101 Attendant Station is assigned with delay 0 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 144 3 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 144 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Ring Assignment to Station To assign a call to the Station the delay value must be entered If a delay value is set the call will begin to ring after the delay time has expired To receive incoming calls instantly the delay value should be set to 0 to delete a programmed CO ring assignment press the SPEED button instead of entering a delay value FLEX1 1 DAY STATION RANGE DELAY TIME Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Ring Assignment to Hunt Group Used to assign ringing at a Station during Night Mode FLEX2 2 NIG
144. SMDR record FLEX5 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Voice Over If this value is set to ON the busy Station can talk alternately between two calling or called parties FLEX6 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Warm Line If this value is set to HOT the Station User can use the Hot Line Otherwise in the Warm Line state the Warm Line Timer will start when the user lifts the handset or presses the MON FLEX7 1 HOT HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 WARM 1 HOT ADMIN 122 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 13 PGM113 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS button VMIB MSG Retrieve Password If this value is set to ON the Station User must enter a password to retrieve the VMIB Messages FLEX8 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON VMIB MSG Retrieve Date Time If this value is set to ON Date and Time will be heard when VMIB messages are retrieved FLEX9 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Alarm Attribute If this value is set to ON the Station will be able to receive alarm signals FLEX10 FLEX1 Alarm Basic 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Alarm Basic FLEX2 Alarm Expansion 0 OFF 1 ON Muted Ring Service If this value is set to ON the Station can receive a Muted Ring tone FLEX11 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Call Cut Off Timer If this value is
145. Station cannot log in PGM 170 When the system reset happens all login agents are automatically logged out Admin Programming Dummy Station ON OFF PGM 112 B TN23 Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Number of Agents PGM 250 FLEX1 Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Assign Station Number of Agents PGM 250 FLEX2 Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Number of Agents PGM 250 FLEX3 2 4 30 Analogue CLI Display Description The ARIA SOHO System supports the following Type I CID protocol specifications Bell core GR 30 CORE amp SR TSV 002476 amp ETSI ETS 300 659 ETSI ETS 300 778 Denmark TDK TS 900 216 US BT SIN 227 amp SIN 242 Sweden Telecom specification 8211 A112 Standard SS 63 63 25 Russia CID Operation When an incoming CO call is received at a CLCOB line that has a FSK CID detection option board 1 The DSP chip on the MBU will detect the FSK CID signal 2 The call will be distributed to Stations with CLI Condition If an incoming CO call is assigned to multiple SLT s of a same slot the CO rings are generated sequentially with a 1 second interval on the SLT s CLI is displayed on the SLT after the first ring For CLI display on the SLT a Ring Phase PGM 182 FLEX4 more than 4 seconds is recommended If the ring phase is less than 4 seconds some of the SLT s will not receive CLI display s
146. TION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Group Timer Assigns the Hunt Group type refer to VALUES FLEX1 Group Type refer to VALUES Range 0 6 HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 Not Assigned 1 Circular 2 Terminal 3 UCD 4 Ring 5 VM 6 Pick up Pick up Attribute Assigns the pick up attributes for the Hunt Group All types of Hunt Groups can be assigned the optional pick up attribute except for the Pick up Hunt Group FLEX2 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Member Assignment Members can be assigned individually by pressing the Flexible Button and the desired User to assign and then enter the Station number Otherwise members can successively be assigned by first entering the Station number and then the last Station number NOTE When there are too many Stations to see you can scroll data using the volume up down keys FLEX3 Station Number HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 58 3 5 2 Station Group Attributes PGM 191 If the Hunt Group type is selected at Admin PGM 190 then the attributes of each Hunt Group can be programmed In this program mode the following items can be customized 5 Press the TRANS PGM button 6 Dial 191 7 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 8 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS VMIB Announce 1 Timer If the call is not answered during t
147. Telephone Number 0 Follow Me Call forward 5 Dial the destination that will receive the call 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button To deactivate Call Forward perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Press the key Call Forward cancel code Condition To use Call Forward a Station should be activated in Admin Programming Admin Programming Allow Off Net Call Forward PGM 111 FLEX18 Authorization Code Table PGM 227 25 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 3 1 1 Call Forward Unconditional Description All incoming calls to a User Station will be immediately forwarded to another Station Hunt Group or VMIB Operation To activate Unconditional Call Forward perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 1 4 Dial Station or Group pilot number to receive the calls 5 Go on hook by replacing the handset 2 3 1 2 Call Forward Busy Description When the User Station is busy calls are forwarded to another designated location Operation To activate Call Forward for when the line is busy perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 2 4 Dial Station Group or VMIB numbe
148. Timer 2 5 1 Digit 020 100ms Determines minimum time necessary to detect a hook flash for SLT 4 SLT Ring Phase Timer 2 5 1 Digit 4 Sec Determines ring cadence of SLT 5 Sec 1 Sec ON 4 Sec OFF 5 Station Auto Release Timer 020 300 3 Digits 060 Sec Determines time delay before releasing the Station on RBT 6 Unsupervised Conference Timer 00 99 2 Digits 10 Min Determines time delay before releasing an Unsupervised Conference after the host has exited 7 Wake Up Fail ring Timer 00 99 2 Digits 20 Sec Determines time delay before alarm ring will be stopped following Wake Up Fail Ring 8 Warm Line Timer 01 20 2 Digits 05 Sec Determines time delay before line will be returned to an idle state on no action 9 Wink Timer 010 200 3 Digits 010 10ms Determines time necessary to detect a DID line secure signal 11 CCR Time Out Timer 000 300 3Digits 015 Sec Determines time delay before CCR is activated 13 FAX Tone Detect Timer 01 10 2 Digits 05 Sec Determines time allowed for FAX Tone to be detected before disconnection 182 14 FAX CO Call Timer 1 5 1 Min Determines time allowed for FAX call before disconnection Station Group Assignment PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Station Group Number STA Group 1 Group Type 0 5 0 Circular Terminal UCD Ring VM Pick Up 2 Pick Up Attribute ON OFF OFF For Hunt Groups 190 3 Member
149. USB ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 5 Admin Programming Index MAIN MENU PGM ITEM 100 Location Program 104 Board Assignment 105 Logical Slot Assignment 106 Flexible Number Plan A 107 Flexible Number Plan B 108 IP Setting 109 Flexible Number Plan C PRE PROGRAMMED DATABASE 250 Hot Desk Attribute 110 Station ID 111 Station Attribute I 112 Station Attribute II 113 Station Attribute III 114 ISDN Station Attribute 115 Flex Button Assignment 116 Station COS 117 CO Line Group Access 118 Internal Page Zone 119 Conference Page Zone 120 ICM Tenancy Group 121 Preset Call Forward 122 Hot Warm Line Selection 124 SMDR Account Group 125 Copy DSS Button 126 Station IP List 130 Display Stations by COS 131 Display Stations by CO Line Group Access STATION DATABASE PROGRAM 140 CO Service Type 141 CO Line Attribute I 142 CO Line Attribute II 144 CO Ring Assignment 145 CO Ring Assignment Display CO LINE BASE PROGRAM 147 CO CID Setting 160 System Attribute I 161 System Attribute II 162 Admin Password 163 Alarm Attributes 164 Attendant Assignment 165 Auto Attendant VMIB Announce Assignment 166 CO to CO COS 167 DISA Destination 168 External Control Contact 169 LCD Date Time Language Display Mode SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 170 Modem 171 Music 172 PBX Access
150. User can respond to a Page from any Station and connect to the Paging party for a private conversation The User should respond to the Page during the Page Time Out duration to connect with the Paging party PAGING CODES ACCESS CODE ITEM 501 510 Internal Page Zone 506 510 Conference Page Zone 543 Internal All Call Page 544 Meet Me Page 545 External Page Zone 549 All Call Page Internal amp External Operation To initialize a Page perform the following Steps 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Dial the desired Paging code 3 Following the Page Warning tone if assigned make desired announcement 4 Go on hook by replacing the Handset To assign a Meet Me Page on a flexible button perform the following 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Dial 544 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes 92 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To respond to a Meet Me Page perform the following 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Dial 544 Meet Me Page code OR 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button 4 The call with the Paging party will be established and the zone will return to idle Condition When External Paging is required appropriate equipment should be attached to the System External Page connections on the MBU A Station in DND or busy
151. VE VALUES 0 SEC 1 HOUR RANGE 1hr or 10 sec Set VM SMDI Type This value sets VM SMDI type FLEX15 1 Type II HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 TYPE I 1 TYPE II Refer to the RS232 Specification document Incoming Toll Check If this value is set to ON the System checks for tolls applied to incoming CO calls FLEX16 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 34 PGM 161 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Auto FAX Transfer CO If Auto FAX CO line is programmed the System answers and detects the FAX calling tone 1100Hz 0 5sec ON 2sec OFF repeat tone from an incoming analog CO line The System will route this call to the last SLT port on the basic MBU Ext 107 or Ext 15 as in compact type KSU when tone is detected within the programmed time FLEX17 CO Line Number Range 01 12 HOLD SAVE No DSS Indication If this value is set to ENABLE the LED indication of the CO or DSS button will be blocked LED will not blink even if there is an incoming call to the assigned CO Line or Station This feature does not apply for direct calls such as DID or DISA FLEX18 0 DISABLE HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE UK Billing Mode UK Only If this value is set to ON the UK Billing Mode is applied FLEX19 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON COS 7 Authorization Fail
152. VMIB Station Range Delay 0 9 Hunt Group VMIB Message CO Ring Assignment Display 1 Day 2 Night 3 Weekend 145 4 On Demand Review CO Line ringing NOTE Scroll data using up down volume keys CO CID Attributes 1 CID Mode Select 0 3 0 Determines which CID Mode will be used 2 CID Name Display NAME TEL NO TEL NO Determines the LCD displayed data to be shown on incoming calls 3 Russia CID Detect LOCAL AL L LOCAL Determines which calls will show CID 4 Russia CID Request USER AUT O USER Determines if CID will be selected by User or Automatically 147 5 Russia CID Request Timer 10 150 15 By default Russia First Request Timer is 15msec 10msec base ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 16 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 6 Russia CID CIRAN Timer 001 300 20 Determines the length of time before the call is dropped in Russian CID mode 7 Russia CID Digit Number 04 10 7 Determines the number of CID digits to receive System Base Program PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK System Attributes I 1 19 1 Attendant Call Queuing Ring back Tone RBT RBT MOH MOH RBT provided to Station when calling busy Attendant otherwise hold tone or VMIB MOH Admin 171 FLEX2 is provided 2 Camp RBT MOH RBT MOH MOH Determines if RBT or MOH is provided during Camp On 3 CO Line Choice LAST ROUND ROUND Dete
153. Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 17 Mute Description During a conversation pressing the MUTE button will disable the Handset Microphone or the Speakerphone for privacy while continuing to listen to the other party on the phone through the Handset or Speaker Pressing the MUTE button again will reactivate the Microphone Operation To Mute the transmitting audio while on a call perform the following Steps 1 Press the MUTE button the button LED should illuminate the connected party will not be able to hear the voice on the muted Station To restore transmission of the audio perform the following 1 Press the illuminated MUTE button the LED should extinguish and transmission will be restored Condition When changing from the Speakerphone to the Handset mute is released When pressing another DSS button the mute state will not be changed 2 4 18 Message Wait Indication MWI SLT Feature Description If the SLT Station receives a message from another User then the SLT LED will flash indicating a message is waiting Condition When lifting the Handset User will hear a DND warning tone indicating a message waiting When a MWI prompt is recorded in the System greeting 097 a voice announcement will be heard instead of the DND warning tone Admin Programming Station ID Assignment PGM 110 FLEX1 57 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Fea
154. aled the recorded message will be played 4 After hearing the announcement and confirmation tone record the desired message 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button OR 93 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 6 Press the MON button when finished recording the confirmation tone should be heard 7 Press the SPEED button while the recorded message is playing to delete the message the confirmation tone should be heard To activate a VMIB message for Paging perform the following 1 Dial the Page code 5xx and lift the Handset 2 The recorded VMIB message will be Paged To delete a VMIB message for Paging perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 67 the recorded message will be cleared OR 3 Press the SPEED button while the recorded message is playing to delete the message the confirmation tone should be heard Admin Programming Paging Timeout Timer PGM 181 FLEX 10 2 8 3 SOS Paging Description The System allows multiple VMIB pre recorded messages for Paging Depending on circumstance the User can utilize pre recorded messages Recorded VMIB messages are Paged to a Page Zone during an emergency Operation To assign VMIB SOS Paging to a flexible button perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Dial 67 the Paging code 5xx 4 Dial the
155. all list can be answered deleted or saved by pressing the Select soft button To Use this feature with the LDP 7208 perform the following 1 Press the programmed CALL LOG button 2 The User can scroll through the numbers by pressing the up down navigation buttons to locate received calls dialed calls and lost calls 3 When the CLI of the desired number is displayed press the OK key the System will establish a call to that number 69 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To use this feature with the LDP 7024LD perform the following 1 Press the programmed CALL LOG button 2 The User can scroll through the numbers by pressing the up down navigation buttons to locate received calls dialed calls and lost calls 3 When the CLI of the desired number is displayed press the SEND key the System will establish a call to that number OR 4 Press DETAIL to display the time and date of the selected call before pressing Send Condition To use this feature a flexible must be programmed for CALL LOG A User can program the Call Log List number in the range of 15 50 per Station PGM 160 FLEX19 When the Call Log List number is programmed the All Call Log database will be initialized Maximum Call Log List per System is 500 for ARIA SOHO The System assigns the Call Log list from the first available port in order Must enable CLI MSG Wait
156. and Operation Manual June 2006 2 6 4 Voice Mail Group Description The Voice Mail VM Group is assigned for voice mail and only SLTs can be assigned as members When calling a VM Group the System will search for an idle member in the calling VM Group with the Terminal type or Circular type 2 6 5 Unified Call Distribution UCD Group Description Calls are sent to the Group by dialing the pilot number assigned Hunt Group number or assigning CO Lines to directly terminate to the Group Calls are directed to the Station in the Group that has been idle for the longest time If all Stations in the Group are busy when a call is received for the Group the call may be routed to an alternate location or may continue to wait queue for an available Station in the group Based on programming the queued call may be taken out of the group and directed to an Overflow Destination Members of a UCD can activate DND a Station in UCE DND will not receive calls CO LINE 2 CO LINE 1 STA110 STA111 STA112 STA113 STA114 STA115 Hunt Group Call 1st Hunt Group Call 2nd CO LINE 3 3rd Hunt Group Call FIGURE 2 6 5 UCD GROUP 85 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Operation To assign UCD DND mode perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the FLEX button 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 87 and enter
157. and down arrows also can be used to locate the desired name 1 When the appropriate name is displayed move the cursor to point at the name 2 Press the HOLD SAVE button to make a call 59 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To search by name using scrolling perform the following Steps 1 While 2 names are displayed in the LCD window use the up and down arrow keys to locate the desired name 2 When the appropriate name is displayed move the cursor so it points directly at the name 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button to make a call To register the name on a SLT phone perform the following Steps 1 Lift the Handset 2 Dial 563 refer to Ref A a confirmation tone should be heard 3 Dial 74 name register code 4 Enter the name up to 7 letters refer to Button Map 5 Hook flash to save Condition Dial by name is only available on a DKTU with LCD The name must be registered to use Dial by Name If an invalid Group is dialed an error tone will be heard On an SLT or DKTU where there is no LCD screen only the Station Name can be entered The Speed Dial without name will not be listed in Dial By Name Reference A Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Programming mode Enter Code PGM 106 FLEX20 2 4 21 Station Programming Description The System supports multiple hierarchical menus based on
158. and generate the report to show call status of the last hour today s peak time yesterday s peak time yesterday s total and today s total Call Hourly report Analysis of call overload by showing the last 24 hour s per hour calls This report includes the following information fields Analysis Start Hour Standing time of hour duration which the data is recorded Number of calls Completed The total number of calls completed or answered during the listed hour Operation To print the Call Summary report from the Main Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0125 To print the Call Hourly report from the Main Attendant Station perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0126 the following is a sample report 3 lt insert graphic gt 126 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 14 3 CO Reports Description The ARIA SOHO System supports the following report to analyze the traffic on CO line groups CO Traffic Summary report Analysis of Co group traffic status by showing applicable statistics The measurement time type can be one of Today s peak time Yesterday s peak time Last hour Yesterday s total and Today s total The report provides the following fields Peak Hour for all CO groups The time duration hour in a day that has the largest total usage when su
159. assigned the music source should be connected to the MBU The same music source can be used with MOH Press the VOLUME button to adjust volume while the background music is heard The BGM may be blocked in an intercom box by pressing the DND FOR button Reference B MOH 2 4 16 Admin Programming Background Music Type PGM 171 FLEX1 44 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 5 Camp On Description A User attempting to call a busy Station can give a signal to the busy Station Camp On that a call is waiting The busy Station is notified of the call waiting by a Camp On tone and the HOLD SAVE button LED will flash An SLT User can notify a busy Station of an outside CO call or internal call waiting Camp On Operation To activate Camp On while receiving an Intercom busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Press the key or the last digit of the busy Station OR 2 Press the busy DSS flexible button or the assigned CAMP ON button To answer a Camp On call while receiving the Intercom busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Press the HOLD SAVE button the active CO Line is placed on exclusive hold and the call waiting is connected 2 Press the HOLD SAVE button to alternatively talk with both parties brokered call To activate Call Waiting on an SLT while receiving the Intercom busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Go off hook th
160. ast dialed number is displayed press the UP or DOWN button to find the desired phone number up to 10 last dialed numbers can be stored in the directory 2 To make a call press the HOLD SAVE button when the appropriate phone number is displayed To use Last Number Redial at a SLT perform the following 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 552 refer to Ref A OR 3 Press the REDIAL button 18 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition When the used CO Line is busy an idle CO Line in the group is accessed and the last dialed number is dialed The last dialed number directory allows duplicate phone numbers to be stored If the Last Number Redial is used while the Auto redial is activated Auto redial is cancelled Reference E Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual SLT Last Speed dial Code PGM 106 FLEX12 2 2 8 3 Save Number Redialing Description Any dialed number can be saved temporarily and used at any time This number is saved until a new number is stored Operation To save a number in the Save Number buffer from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Press the SPEED button twice while on a conversation with an external party 2 Replace the handset or go on hook To dial a number from the Save Number Redial buffer from a DKTU perform the following 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button
161. ation Manual June 2006 To store Station Speed Dial numbers from a SLT perform the following 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Speed dial program code 555 refer to Ref C 3 Dial the Speed Dial bin number 000 099 4 Dial the desired phone number up to 24 digits 5 Press and release the hook switch To make a call using Station speed Dial from a SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Speed dial access code 558 refer to Ref D 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial bin 000 099 To delete a Station speed dial from a SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Speed Dial access code 555 refer to Ref C 3 Dial the appropriate Station Speed Dial bin 000 099 4 Press and release the hook switch Condition The Station Speed dial is secured in data protect mode when the power is OFF There can be a maximum of 24 digits in a Station Speed dial number including special digits and function codes An error tone will be heard when an empty Station Speed Dial bin is dialed If a CO Line is selected prior to entering a Speed Dial bin number the chosen CO Line will still be used regardless of the programmed CO Line in the bin number A Station name can be programmed max 12 characters in the DKTU to be presented instead of a Station number The name will be programmed in the Speed Dial bin 000 when a Station name is programmed the Speed bin is not used as a Station Speed Dial bin Reference A C
162. ave Enable ON OFF OFF Max 500 SMDR data can be recorded 177 2 SMDR Print Enable ON OFF OFF Determines if SMDR data is printed real time through the seria Modem LAN port ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 21 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 3 SMDR Recording Type LD ALL CALL LD LD Only outgoing Long Distance Admin 177 FLEX4 or FLEX14 calls are recorded ALL All outgoing calls are recorded 4 SMDR Long Distance Call Digit Counter 07 15 07 Determines Long Distance Admin 177 FLEX4 or FLEX14 calls via digit counter 5 Print Incoming Call ON OFF OFF Determines if all incoming calls are printed 6 Print Lost Call On OFF OFF Unanswered calls are printed 7 Records in Detail ON OFF ON ON All calls including total metering count total cost per Station and detailed record is recorded for up to 5000 records OFF All calls with total metering and total cost per Station is recorded 8 SMDR Dial Digit Hidden 0 9 0 Determines number of digits hidden with symbol set direction using Admin 177 FLEX13 9 SMDR Currency Unit 3 English alpha characters Identifies currency unit being used on call costs ex USD United States Dollar 10 SMDR Cost Per Use Pulse 6 Digits Call cost unit per cost metering pulse sent from Central Office 11 SMDR Fraction 0 5 0 Determines decimal position of cost per unit pulse 12 SMDR Sta
163. ay Zone 3 Time Zone1 00 24 0024 Time Zone2 00 24 220 Time Zone3 00 24 Each day zone can use a different LCR setting and can be grouped in up to three zones Leading Digit Table 000 249 1 LCR Type 1 3 3 Determines LCR Type 2 LCR Code Leading Digit Max 12 Digits Dialed digits matching designated value will be converted and CO Line will be secured according to DMT Admin PGM222 3 Day Zone 1 DMT 6 Digits Determines the Table Index DMT Admin PGM222 of Day Zone 1 Because there are three different time zones one table index must be selected for each 4 Day Zone 2 DMT 6 Digits Determines the Table Index DMT Admin PGM222 of Day Zone 2 Because there are three different time zones one table index must be selected for each 5 Day Zone 3 DMT 6 Digits Determines the Table Index DMT Admin PGM222 of Day Zone 3 Because there are three different time zones one table index must be selected for each 221 6 Check Password ON OFF OFF Determines if System will prompt for an access code prior to using LCR 222 Digit Modification Table 00 99 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 29 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Added Digit Max 25 Digits Determines value of digit stream to add on user dialed digits Add Position Admin PGM222 FLEX4 2 Removal Position 1 12 1 Determines position of digit stream to remove on user dialed
164. be used in an Emergency situation only by an authorized user The Station base program will be implemented for this feature Operation To activate Forced Trunk Disconnect perform the following Steps Secure a CO Line When the Authorized User hears the busy tone dial the Forced Trunk Disconnect code The busy line should return to an idle state and the Authorized User can initiate a new outside call Condition Only an Authorized User with the Emergency Supervisor programmed can use the Forced Trunk Disconnect feature This feature is available on Analog Lines only 72 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Admin Programming Emergency Supervisor PGM 112 FLEX24 2 4 36 Barge In Description Barge In allows an authorized User to intrude on an existing call internal or outside a conference call is established The two forms of Barge In include Monitor The intruding Station can listen to the existing conversation Speech The intruding Station can join the existing conversation Operation To set up a Monitor Barge In perform the following Steps 1 Call the busy Station the User will hear a busy tone 2 Press the programmed Monitor button on the appropriate Soft Button 3 The User will be able to hear the call in progress and those on the existing call will hear a brief warning tone To set up a Speech Barge In perform the following 1
165. be viewed Night COS for extra entries can also be assigned FLEX3 Class of Service Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 80 3 9 2 Custom Call Routing PGM 228 The caller can select the destination according to the options outlined in the VMIB announcement In the LDK system maximum 70 VMIB announcements can be used and 10 different destination types can be selected refer to Procedure table In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 228 3 Enter the appropriate CCR Table Number Range 1 70 4 Press FLEX1 5 Enter the appropriate Bin number Range FLEX1 FLEX10 6 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 228 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Station The call will ring at the designated Station 01 Station Number HOLD SAVE Hunt Group The call will ring at the designated member Station in the Group 02 Hunt Group Number HOLD SAVE VMIB Announcement The designated VMIB announcement will be played to the caller 03 VMIB Announcement Number HOLD SAVE VMIB Drop The designated VMIB announcement will be played to the caller and the call will be disconnected after the VMIB announcement is played 04 VMIB Announcement Number HOLD SAVE System Speed The call will be routed to the System Speed telephone number 05 Sys
166. button SLT User 1 Lift the Handset to answer the page 2 Hook switch and dial 58 Conference Page Join code Condition Page Timer is not activated by to a Paging Conference Group If a second party is participating Meet Me Page is disabled If the Conference Originator goes on hook the Conference Group paging connection is released The second party can page during the conference regardless of page access privilege Admin Programming Paging Warning Tone PGM 161 FLEX4 Paging Access PGM 111 FLEX8 Conference Page Zone PGM 119 Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual SLT Conference Page Join Code PGM 109 FLEX5 2 7 3 Conference Room Description This feature allows internal Users or CO Line callers including transferred callers to join a conference without being invited by the Conference Supervisor The Conference Room has join codes room number A DISA and transferred CI call can participate in a conference The Conference Room feature will terminate when the deactivation code is dialed or Forced Delete program code is entered by the Attendant Operation To activate the Conference Room feature perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 43 the Conference Room number 1 9 and the password optional 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button 90 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 200
167. button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 7 4 Dial the CO Line Group access code 9 801 8XX 8801 88XX or 8 for all CO Lines or press CO Line button 5 Dial the Speed Dial Bin number with the desired phone number 6 Go on hook by replacing the handset Condition If there is no idle CO Line Off Net Call Forward is not activated It is unconditional and forwarded immediately when the CO Line rings in the System If a speed bin is programmed on a flexible button you may press the Flexible button instead of dialing the Speed Bin number Toll restriction will be based on the COS of the outgoing CO Line 2 3 1 8 Call Forward Follow Me Description Follow Me Call Forward can be activated at the Station or from any Station in the System with Call Forward access It must be programmed from the Station that you will be forwarded to and a user password must be entered at the User Station first 29 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Operation To activate Follow Me Call Forward from any Station perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 0 4 Dial the Station number to which calls will be forwarded 5 Dial the forwarding Station authorization code 6 Go on hook by replacing the handset To use register the authorization
168. button 2 Dial 117 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number or Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM117 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS CO Line Group Each Station is assigned a Class of Service COS that determines the Station toll restriction for day and night operation On a particular call the CO COS is combined with Station COS to determine the restriction The weekend COS is the same as night COS Eight CO Line Groups are available in the ARIA SOHO VALUE Range FLEX1 FLEX8 Toggle HOLD SAVE 3 1 9 Page Zones PGM 118 119 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 118 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number or Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS PGM 118 Internal Page Zone Each Station is assigned to an internal page zone ARIA SOHO supports 10 internal paging zones FLEX1 FLEX5 ZONE01 ZONE05 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default ZONE01 PGM 119 Conference Page Zone Each Station can be assigned to five different conference page zones 06 10 FLEX1 FLEX5 ZONE06 ZONE10 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default None ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 18 3 1 10 Intercom Tenancy Group PGM 120 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRA
169. can monitor the agent but will not send audio to the agent To report ACD status perform the following Steps 1 Press the ACD flexible button 2 Dial the ACD Status feature code refer to values 1 Status 2 Database 3 Duty Print 3 In the Status mode the supervisor can initialize the Group statistics by pressing the MUTE button 86 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To assign an ACD flexible button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 8 and enter the ACD Group number 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition The User can see the Group status via the Group Supervisor or by periodically printing to RS 232C print To print ACD statistics periodically set the ACD Print timer PGM 161 FLEX10 10 sec base Agents also can print and view the ACD statistics as the supervisor The agent can login and logout using the Hot Desk feature Reference A Traffic Analysis 2 14 Admin Programming Hunt Group Assignment PGM 190 Hunt Group Attribute PGM 191 ACD Print Enable PGM 161 FLEX9 ACD Print Timer PGM 161 FLEX10 ACD Clear Database after Print PGM 161 FLEX 11 87 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 7 Conf
170. cannot receive a Page When one Page is active another Page cannot be made The Page warning tone may be controlled by Admin Programming When the Page timer expires the Paging connection will be released and ICM busy tone will be presented to the Paging Station LIFT HANDSET TO PAGE will be displayed on the Station LCD if attempting to make a Page without lifting the Handset If an Intercom call is received at the Paging Station the caller will receive the Intercom busy tone If a CO Line call is received at the Paging Station the caller will receive an off hook ring A Station may respond to a Meet Me Page regardless of Group assignment and Page Access A Page from A CO Line can not be answered by pressing the HOLD SAVE button or the code of the Meet Me Answer If a User tries to answer a Meet Me Page request from the CO Line an error tone will be presented and an LCD error message will be displayed Admin Programming Paging Timeout Timer PGM 181 FLEX10 Page Warning Tone PGM 161 FLEX4 Internal Page Zone PGM 118 External Control Contact PGM 168 2 8 2 Pre Recorded Message Description The Station User can record a VMIB message for Paging Operation To record a VMIB message for Paging perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 65 3 The announcement Press the key to record should be heard If there already is a recorded message at the number di
171. ce A Authorization code 2 5 2 B SMDR 2 12 C COS 2 5 4 Admin Programming Authorization Code Table PGM 227 80 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 6 Hunt Group Description Stations can be grouped so incoming calls may be routed to an idle Station in the Group The ARIA SOHO System will support up to 10 Hunt Groups and 26 Stations in a Hunt Group Several VMIB Announcements may be provided to each Hunt Group If a call is not answered when the first Announcement timer expires the second announcement will be provided if the call continues to wait The second Announcement may be repeated until the call is answered or disconnected by the User A Hunt Group may be assigned as one of the following 5 types HUNT GROUPS CIRCULAR A cal is routed to the Hunt Group if the 1st destination is unavailable or does not answer the call is routed to the next Station in the Group TERMINAL If the call is unanswered or unavailable it is directed to the next listed Station in the Group The call will continue to be routed until it reaches the last Station in the Group UNIFIED CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD Calls are routed to the Station in the Group that has been idle for the longest time RING All Stations in the Group will ring when a call is received VOICE MAIL VM This Group is assigned for Voice Mail and only the SLT assigned as the member of the VM Group
172. ceived messages perform the following 1 Dial 1 in the main menu of VMIB Remote Control mode 2 The recorded time amp date of messages should be heard 3 Press the desired number refer to values 1 Listen to current message again 2 Listen to the next message 3 Delete the current message 4 Delete all received messages To change the User greeting perform the following Steps 1 Dial 2 in the main menu of the VMIB Remote Control mode 2 While the User greeting is playing press the key to record a new User greeting 3 Record the new User greeting 4 Press the key when finished recording VMIB will return to the main menu To release Call forward to VMIB mode perform the following Steps 1 Dial 3 in the main menu of the VMIB Remote Control mode the Station VMIB Forward mode will be released To exit VMIB Remote Control mode perform the following 1 Dial in the main menu of the VMIB Control mode Condition Pressing the key while operating in a sub menu the System will go to the main control menu If the User doesn t enter any digits during the inter digit timer the connection will be dropped automatically If the VMIB User Record timer expires while recording a User greeting the recording will be finished and VMIB will return to the main menu Reference A DISA 2 1 3 Admin Programming VMIB User Record Timer PGM 181 FLEX3 Inter Digit Timer PGM 1
173. changed to 7 on Authorization Code failure 21 5 Digit Authorization Code Usage ON OFF OFF Determines if the Authorization code is fixed length 5 digits or can be set from 3 11 digits 22 LCR Dial Tone Detect ON OFF OFF Determines if the System will first check the CO dial tone in case of analog CO for LCR if there is no dial tone the call will be re routed to the Alternate DMT index 162 Admin Password 4 Digits Not Assigned Determines if Admin Password is used 1 Alarm Enable ON OFF Determines if Alarm is available to use 2 Alarm contact Type CLOSE OPEN CLOSE 3 Alarm Mode ALARM BELL ALARM 163 4 Alarm Signal Mode RPT ONCE RPT Determines if Alarm is set to Repeat or to ring Once 164 1 5 Attendant Assignment STA No System Attendant Station 101 Main Attendants Not Assigned Up to 5 total Attendants 1 System 4 Main Attendants Auto Attendant 1 Auto Attendant Usage ON OFF OFF Determines if Auto Attendant is used 165 2 Auto Attendant VMIB Announce Number 00 70 00 Not Assigned Determines the number of VMIB Announcements played when Auto Attendant is Activated CO to CO COS Same Attributes as Station COS used on DID DISA TIE calls accessing another CO Line 1 Day COS 166 2 Night Weekend COS 1 9 1 DISA Destination FLEX1 FLEX4 Designates routing of incoming DISA calls following DISA Retry Counter expiration 1 Busy Destination
174. cted by timer length 113 13 Barge In Mode 0 2 0 OFF Determines if calls can be intruded on by another Station ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 13 ISDN Station Attributes PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 CLIP LCD Display ON OFF ON Determines if CLI is displayed at the Station 2 COLP LCD Display ON OFF OFF Determines if calling party CLI is displayed at the Station 3 CLI Redirect Display CLI REDIRECT CLI Determines which CLI is used at the Station 4 CLI MSG Wait ON OFF OFF Determines CLI receipt on No Answer 5 9 Reserved 10 DISA Restriction ON OFF OFF Determines if the Station is restricted to receive DISA incoming calls 114 11 CLI Name Display ON OFF OFF Determines if the CLI name is shown on incoming calls Flexible Button Assignment 01 44 01 User Key User Programmable 02 CO Button 01 12 CO Line access 03 CO Line Group Button 1 8 CO Line Group access 04 LOOP Button 05 STA xxx Button Station No Station No access 06 STA PGM Button 11 99 Station Programming code 0 44 07 STA SPEED xxx Button Station Speed Bin No Speed Bin access 08 SYS SPEED XXXX Button Station Speed Bin No System Speed Bin access 09 FLEX Number Button Numbering Plan Code 115 11 Hunt Group button Hunt Group No Hunt Group access Station Base Program PGM FLEX ITEM RANG
175. d ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 83 3 9 5 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 The Weekly time Table can manage ring mode changes automatically For example the office work starts at 9 00AM and finishes at 5 00PM during week days weekends start at 5 00PM on Fridays lasting through Sunday as shown in the following table SAMPLE WEEKLY TIME TABLE WEEKLY TBL MON D 09 00 N 17 00 W WEEKLY TBL TUE D 09 00 N 17 00 W WEEKLY TBL WED D 09 00 N 17 00 W WEEKLY TBL THU D 09 00 N 17 00 W WEEKLY TBL FRI D 09 00 N W 17 00 WEEKLY TBL SAT D N W 00 00 WEEKLY TBL SUN D N W 00 00 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 233 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 233 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Weekly Time Table Use of the Weekly Time Table is executed by the System Attendant and each Intercom Tenancy Group Attendant VALUE Range 0 5 FLEX1 Day Mode Range FLEX1 FLEX7 Day Night Weekend Mode FLEX1 FLEX3 Time HH MM HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 84 3 9 6 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 234 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 234 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Voice Mai
176. d ICM calls can be forwarded to Off net FLEX12 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 External off net Call Fwd is only allowed EXT 0 Internal and External Off net Call Fwd are allowed ALL UCD Group Service This feature is used when a Station receives a DID DISA call If this value is set to ON the UCD Group the Station belongs to will receive the incoming call If this value is set to OFF the Station receives the incoming call directly whether the Station is busy or not FLEX13 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Ring Group Service This feature is used when a Station in a Ring Group receives a DID DISA call If this value is set to ON the Ring Group the Station belongs to will receive the incoming call If this value is set to OFF the Station receives the incoming call directly FLEX14 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Stop Camp on Tone If this value is set to ON Camp on Tone is not heard FLEX15 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Line Length This feature is used to distinguish the line length when the distance between the Stations and the Station boards is too variable SAF only FLEX16 1 LONG HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 SHORT 1 LONG 2 FAR Block Back Call If this value is set to ON SLT recalling is blocked after pressing the FLASH button FLEX18 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON I Time RST Incom
177. d press the CONF button again all parties will be connected to the call 88 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To initiate a Multi Line Conference perform the following Steps 1 During an existing call press the CONF button the call will be put on Hold and the intercom dial tone will be heard 2 Dial the digits to connect the second internal party when the call is answered press the CONF button 3 When all parties have been called press the CONF button again all parties will be connected to the call To initiate an Unsupervised Conference perform the following 1 During an existing call press the CONF button from the Supervisor Station 2 The conference will continue unsupervised and the Supervisor Station LED should flash 3 To re enter the conference the Supervisor can lift the Station handset and press the CONF button again Condition The Unsupervised Conference timer default 10min will be activated if internal Stations leave the conference and it continues timer will be reset if the internal Station re enters the conference Up to 15 parties internal external can enter and participate in a conference In Multi Line Conference up to 12 CO Lines can participate in the conference with a minimum of one internal Station If the Supervisor in a conference receives an error or busy tone from an internal Station while attemptin
178. ding Call Type As an assignable database option if All Call Record is selected incoming and outgoing local and long distance calls are all available If only Long Distance is selected then only outgoing calls that meet the toll check status requirements listed will be connected A Long Distance Call is defined as a call that satisfies the condition of FLEX4 or FLEX14 FLEX3 0 ALL CALL HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 ALL CALL 1 LONG DISTANCE SMDR Long Distance Call Digit Counter Outgoing calls are measured to see if the digit counters are exceeded If so the call is considered a long distance call FLEX4 VALUE Range 07 15 HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX4 or FLEX14 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 48 PGM 177 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Print Incoming Call If value is set to ON all incoming calls can be printed FLEX5 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Print Lost Call If value is set to ON lost calls are printed lost calls are defined a calls that are unanswered FLEX6 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Records in Detail If this value is set to ON not only local calls total metering count and total cost for individual Stations but also the detailed call records are saved up to a maximum of 5000 If this value is set to OFF only total calls will be recorded total metering count and total cost for indivi
179. dmin Programming Attendant Assignment PGM 164 Intercom Tenancy Group Attendant Assignment PGM 120 FLEX1 2 13 2 Attendant Call and Queuing Description An Attendant call is when an Intercom call or CO call is made to an Attendant In order to make an Intercom call to the Attendant a User can enter the Station number of the Attendant or dial 0 If a User dials a 0 it will ring at the assigned Attendant of the Intercom Tenancy group that the Station belongs to If there is no Station assigned as the Attendant the call will ring at the main Attendant Calls to any Attendant will be queued if that attendant is busy ring back tone or MOH refer to Ref B will be provided to the calling party PGM 160 FLEX1 Operation To initiate a call to an Attendant perform the following 1 Lift Handset or press the MON button 2 Dial 0 OR 3 Enter the Station number of the Attendant Condition When an Attendant calls another Attendant that is busy the calling attendant will hear the busy tone and can initiate a Camp On refer to Ref C if desired Reference A Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 14 B Music on Hold MOH 2 4 16 C Camp On 2 4 5 D Call Forward Unconditional 2 3 1 115 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Admin Programming Main Attendant Assignment PGM 164 MOH Type PGM 171 FLEX2 Intercom Tenancy Group Attendant
180. dual CO Line Access code CO Group Access code or the first CO Line Access code from the accessible group To access a CO Line from a SLT perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the individual CO Line Group Access code or the first CO Line Access code from the accessible group To access a CO Line Group perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Press 8 or the CO Group 3 Dial the CO Group number refer to Ref A 9 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To assign the LOOP button perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the FLEX button 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 84 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition A DKTU should have an idle appearance CO Line Pool button Loop button to access an incoming outgoing CO Line When the Override 1st CO Line Group is enabled the System will search for the next accessible CO Group until a CO Line is available if there is no available CO Line by dialing the CO Line Group Access code 9 or 0 An error tone should be able to receive a transferred CO Line call as applicable The CO Line choice Round Robin or Last Choice is determined by Admin Programming Admin 160 FLEX3 Unused CO Lines should be assigned to unused CO Group 9 to prevent being accessed by a Station The first CO Line Group 00 is
181. dual Stations FLEX7 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON SMDR Dial Digit Hidden If this value is set to a non zero value the printed digits from right or left will be replaced with a symbol up to the designated value The direction of hidden digits can be set at Admin PGM 177 FLEX13 FLEX8 VALUE Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE SMDR Currency Unit For easy identification of call costs the currency unit can be entered with 3 alphabet characters to be printed in front of the call charge amount FLEX9 VALUE 3 Characters refer to the Key set Map HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON KEYSET MAP 13 Q 11 Z 12 1 10 A 21 B 22 C 23 2 20 D 31 E 32 F 33 3 30 G 41 H 42 I 43 4 40 J 51 K 52 L 53 5 50 M 61 N 62 O 63 6 60 P 71 Q 72 R 73 S 74 7 70 T 81 U 82 V 83 8 80 W 91 X 92 Y 93 Z 9 9 90 1 Blank 2 3 0 00 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 49 PGM 177 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS SMDR Cost Per Unit Pulse The metering pulse is used to measure call cost per unit which is sent from the Central Office location of the System FLEX10 001000 Range 6 digits HOLD SAVE SMDR Fraction The decimal position point of the cost pe
182. e HOLD SAVE LED will extinguish and the remaining call will be connected as in the normal talking state following presentation of the confirmation tone The holding party will receive MOH if provided refer to Ref B The Recall timer is not activated during Voice Over Every time the busy Station switches between the callers a confirmation tone should be heard If the busy Station is using the Handset Voice Over will be activated via the handset likewise if a busy Station is using the speaker Voice Over will be activated using the Speakerphone Reference A Camp On 2 4 5 B MOH 2 4 16 Admin Programming Voice Over GM 113 FLEX 6 63 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 25 Wake Up Description Each Attendant or Station User can set an alarm as a Wake Up call or reminder tone This feature can be programmed to activate only once or to repeat daily If the User goes off hook during the alarm a special dial tone will be heard Operation To register a Wake up Time Alarm from the Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 042 3 Dial the Station range to be alerted if a single Station is to receive the alarm enter instead of a second Station number 4 Dial the desired time the alarm should alert 2 digit hour and minute 24 hour mode 5 Press the key to have the alarm alert once only
183. e table indices of each time must be selected FLEX3 DMT Index 6 digits Range 00 90 HOLD SAVE DMT Index Day Zone2 Used to set the table index DMT Admin PGM 222 of Day Zone2 Because Day Zone2 has 3 different time zones all three table indices of each time must be selected FLEX4 DMT Index 6 digits Range 00 90 HOLD SAVE DMT Index Day Zone3 Used to set the table index DMT Admin PGM 222 of Day Zone3 Because Day Zone3 has 3 different time zones all three table indices of each time must be selected FLEX5 DMT Index 6 digits Range 00 90 HOLD SAVE FLEX Check Password If this value is set to ON the LDK System will request the User account code when dialed digits match the LCR code FLEX6 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 72 3 7 3 Digit Modification Table PGM222 Digit Modification Table DMT is used to convert the dialed digits and secure the outgoing CO line In the LDK System maximum of 100 DMT entries can be programmed In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 222 3 Enter the appropriate VALUE DMT Table Range 00 99 each DMT entry has six sub attributes as shown DMT TABLE FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK VALUE FLEX1 Added Digit Stream A NONE Up to 20 digits FLEX2 Removal Position RP 01 01 1
184. e flexible button for the Intercom box 3 After hearing the warning tone announce the call To place a call from an Intercom box perform the following 1 Press the CALL button and the assigned Station will ring To answer an Intercom call at a Station assigned for Intercom box signals perform the following DKTU 1 Press the Intercom flexible button or Intercom box SLT 1 Go off hook To place an Intercom box in DND mode refer to Ref A perform the following 1 Press the DND button 99 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition The intercom box cannot attend a conference refer to Ref B The CO call is not received at the Intercom box An Intercom box can be a member of a Page Zone group refer to Ref C To receive an Intercom box call at a SLT set the Intercom box signaling value to ON PGM 111 FLEX6 If the Nation Code is TELKOM or ISRAEL the DSS button for the Intercom box should be assigned to the SLT PGM 115 A SLT can only receive one call from the Intercom box at a time Only the LDP DPB can be used and the DPU should be installed Reference A DND 2 4 9 B Conference 2 7 C Paging Feature 2 8 Admin Programming ICM Box Signaling PGM 111 FLEX6 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 ICM Box Music Channel PGM 171 FLEX3 ICM Box Timer PGM 181 FLEX6 2 10 3 Loud Bell LBC De
185. e following Steps 1 Press the appropriate DSS flexible button the original call will be disconnected and a new call will be established 2 4 24 Voice Over Description This feature provides voice announcements at a busy station without interrupting the existing conversation The announcement is received over the existing conversation so that only the busy Station hears both incoming parties The User can alternately talk back with both parties Operation To use Voice Over perform the following 1 A busy Station is called and Camped On by the caller refer to Ref A 2 The busy Station will hear a warning tone over the current voice path indicating the Camped On call 3 The busy Station is connected with both the current caller and a new caller the busy Station can send and receive voice to both simultaneously the new caller and current caller can not send and receive voice to each other 4 Alternate between the new call and the current call by pressing the HOLD SAVE button the HOLD SAVE button LED should flash at 60ipm while Voice Over is in use 5 When placing each call on hold to converse with the other that call will hear MOH Condition Placing a Station in DND will disable Voice Over function The Attendant can activate Voice Over at a Station in DND mode After Voice Over is activated both calls will be dropped if the Busy Station receiving the calls hangs up If either of the callers hangs up th
186. eated message waiting reminder tones to the Station FLEX9 Seconds 2 digits Range 00 60 HOLD SAVE Paging Timeout Timer Designates the maximum time for a page The System will automatically disconnect the page when the timer expires FLEX10 Seconds 3 digits Range 000 255 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 54 PGM 181 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Pause Timer Used for Speed Dial or LNR the LDK System sends the dialed digits to the outgoing CO line after the designated time FLEX11 Seconds 1 digits Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE Preset Call Forward Timer After the timer expires incoming calls will be forwarded to a predetermined Station FLEX12 Seconds 2 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE SLT DTMF Release Timer FLEX13 Seconds 2 digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE 3Soft Auto Release Timer 3soft Button DKTU LDH 30DH Only In the 3soft button menu if no digits are pressed within the designated time the DKTU will return to an idle state FLEX14 Seconds 2 digits Range 01 30 HOLD SAVE VM Pause Timer FLEX15 VALUE 100 m sec 2 digits Range 01 99 HOLD SAVE Transit Connect Timer Designates the amount of time before the Master System sends a connect message to the Slave System when using a pulse analog trunk FLEX16 VALUE 2 digits Range 01 30 HOLD SAVE VMIB Message Rewind
187. ects the call before the call is answered The format for the individual call record is illustrated below and the contents are focused on each case about the types of lost call NO STA CO TIME START DIALED 0001 EXT 031 00 00 10 24 05 99 11 55 R RING 00 05 Normal incoming call is received at an assigned stations of CO 031 during 5 sec 0002 101 003 00 01 20 25 05 99 16 23 R RNG 00 09 DID call is disconnected during it is being forwarded to ATD STA 101 because the dialed station does not exist 0003 100 001 00 00 20 25 05 99 18 11 R100 RING 00 04 DID call is received at STA 100 during 4sec and disconnected 0004 102 002 00 01 20 26 05 99 18 37 R103 RING 00 04 DID call is received at STA 102 via unconditional call forward to STA 103 during 4 sec and disconnected 0005 621 008 00 00 20 26 05 99 13 02 G620 RING 00 06 DID call is received at Ring Group 621 during 6sec and disconnected 112 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 0006 100 001 00 00 04 06 05 99 16 04 H100 RING 00 02 DID call is disconnected while STA 100 is being held it 0007 102 001 00 00 07 06 05 99 17 04 H100 RING 00 02 DID call is disconnected while it is being transferred from STA 100 to STA 102 G Incoming call to hunt group see Ref A but the caller hangs up before answer H Answered incoming call was transferred to another station but the ca
188. ed digits are matched with one of the leading digits and FLEX2 is INT or BOTH Loop LCR is applied if the dialed digits are matched with one of the leading digits and FLEX2 is COL or BOTH Direct CO LCR is applied if the dialed digits are matched with one of the leading digits FLEX2 is COL or BOTH and the secured CO Line belongs to the programmed CO Group in DMT To work Loop LCR and Direct CO LCR differently with the same leading digits there should be a leading digit entry for loop LCR prior to the leading digits for direct CO LCR It is possible if the DMT index for loop LCR is smaller than the DMT index for direct CO LCR While Direct CO LCR is applied to ISDN CO an ISDN information message with called party IE which includes only the numbering plan and numbering type is sent to the Network when a User dials a digit It is for the network not to disconnect the line For Direct CO LCR leading digits should be programmed in consideration with the dial tone item provided by the Network Direct CO LCR does not use an alternative DMT index if a CO Line is already accessed LCR always has the higher precedence than the Flexible Numbering Plan Table LCR can be applied in the following instances Dialing after accessing a CO Line by dialing a CO Line access code 9 or 0 only Dialing after accessing a CO Line by pressing he LOOP button Dialing without accessing a CO Line Speed Dial Off Net Call Forward Red
189. efer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Numbering Plan PGM 106 2 4 1 2 Pre Selected Message Description A User can choose from pre selected messages 1 10 to be shown on the calling party LCD Detailed information is entered by each User ex time date or station number The pre selected messages include Message 01 LUNCH RETURN AT TIME HH MM Message 02 ON VACATION RETURN AT DATE MM DD Message 03 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT TIME HH MM Message 04 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT DATE MM DD Message 05 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN UNKNOWN Message 06 CALL Telephone Number up to 17 digits Message 07 IN OFFICE STATION XXX Message 08 IN A MEETING RETURN TIME HH MM Message 09 AT HOME Message 10 AT BRANCH OFFICE 41 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Operation To activate LCD messages Custom Pre Selected from a Station or from the System Attendant perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 51 3 Dial the 2 digit message code 00 or 01 10 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel LCD messages Custom Pre Selected from a Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the DND FOR button OR 2 Press the TRANS PGM button 3 Dial 51 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition If a Station assigns call forward while a Pre Selected Message is active the Pre Selected message is aut
190. eference A Hunt Group 2 6 B VMIB Announcement 2 11 5 C Ring Mode 2 13 8 D System Attendant 2 13 Admin Programming CO Service Type PGM 140 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 Hunt Group PGM 190 3 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 1 2 Preferred Line Answer PLA Description If PLA service is enabled and there are several incoming CO calls transferred recalled queued or Normal Incoming call at the same time the first answered call can be chosen by setting the PLA priority NOTE The default setting for answer order is Transferred call gt Recalled call gt Normal Incoming call gt CO Line Queued call Operation If there s multiple CO calls ringing at a station and the call is answered at one of the Stations the call with the highest priority automatically will be answered first Condition Automatic Speaker Select feature should be enabled The Priority of CO Line for PLA can be changed by Admin Programming Admin Programming Preferred Line Answer PGM 112 FLEX7 Automatic Speaker Selection PGM111 FLEX1 PLA Priority Setting PGM 173 2 1 3 Direct Inward System Access DISA The DISA feature allows incoming CO calls to access a specific destination bypassing the Attendant Station On accessing an incoming CO Line the system will give the pre recorded VMIB announcement refer to Ref
191. eled 13 ACNR Tone Detect Timer 001 300 3 Digits 030 Sec Determines the amount of time CPTU will await valid tone detection before ACNR is canceled 14 Automatic CO Release Timer 020 300 3 Digits 030 Sec Determines the amount of time before a CO Line call will be disconnected 15 CCR Inter Digit Timer 000 255 3 Digits 030 Sec DISA DID CO Line CCR Inter Digit timer 16 CO Call Drop Warning Timer 00 99 2 Digits 10 Sec Warning Tone timer prior to call disconnect 17 Reserved 18 CO Dial Delay Timer 00 99 2 Digits 01 100ms Determines the amount of time delay exists on called digits before voice service is activated 19 CO Release Guard Timer 001 150 3 Digits 020 100ms Determines the amount of time delay exists before a new CO Line call can be initialized 180 20 CO Ring OFF Timer 010 150 3 Digits 060 100ms Determines the amount of time between incoming ringing signals so active ringing extends for the duration of the Timer ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 23 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 21 CO Ring ON Timer 1 9 1 Digit 2 100ms Determines the amount of time needed to detect incoming CO calls to the System 22 CO Warning Tone Timer 060 900 3 Digits 180 Sec Determines the amount of time System will await ICM digits dialed before presenting an error tone 1 Call Forward No Answer Time
192. en press the key or the last digit of the dialed Station number 2 When answered the call should be announced OR 3 Go on hook by replacing the handset To answer Call Waiting Camp On at a SLT perform the following Steps 1 When the SLT Station is busy the Camp On tone should be heard indicating a Camp On has been activated 2 Press the hook flash and dial 560 refer to Ref A 3 The SLT Station should be connected to the Camp On call 4 Press hook flash again and dial 560 to connect the original call To assign CAMP ON to a flexible button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Type 85 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to save changes Condition During a conference or paging Call Waiting is not activated refer to Ref B Ref C Camp On is not applied to a Station which is in DND mode refer to Ref D The Attendant can override a Station using the Camp On feature refer to Ref E If the Stop Camp On tone PGM 112 FLEX15 is set to Enable the Camp On tone will not be heard 45 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Reference A Refer to the ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual System Hold Code PGM 106 FLEX20 B Conference 2 7 C Paging 2 8 D DND 2 4 8 E Attendant Override 2 13 5 Ad
193. endants WEEKLY TIME TABLE DATE DAY START TIME NIGHT START TIME WEEKEND START TIME Mon 09 00 18 00 Tue 09 00 18 00 Wed 09 00 18 00 Thu 09 00 18 00 Fri 09 00 18 00 Sat 00 00 Sun 00 00 120 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 On Demand mode is not available in the Automatic ring mode The Attendants of Intercom Tenancy groups can change the ring mode as well as Main Attendants Intercom Tenancy group attendants only effect the Intercom Tenancy group they belong to System Main Attendant ring mode changes affect the whole System When the ring mode is set to Automatic ring mode by the System Main Attendant the ring mode of the whole System will follow the first table entry 00 of the Weekly Time Table If the System ring mode is changed from the Night Weekend On Demand or Auto ring mode to day mode the ring mode of all Intercom Tenancy groups will change to the previous ring mode In External night ring is Enabled and the System is in Night mode the LBC1 Contact will follow the incoming UNA assigned CO Lines Reference A Ring Assignment 2 1 1 Admin Programming CO Line Ring Assignment PGM 144 External Control Contact PGM 168 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 2 13 9 Disable Outgoing Access Description An Attendant can take a particular CO Line out of service CO calls will
194. eps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 5 4 Secure a CO Line if required 5 Dial the Speed dial bin number with the desired phone number 6 Go on hook by replacing the handset To activate no answer Off Net Call Forward perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 6 4 Secure a CO Line if required 5 Dial the Speed dial bin number with the desired phone number 6 Go on hook by replacing the handset To use Call Forward no answer on a pre assigned flexible button 1 Press the assigned flexible button 2 The LED of DND FOR button will flash and the function assigned to the flexible button will be activated 2 3 1 6 Call Forward Station Off Net with Telephone Number Unconditional No Answer Description Stations allowed to forward calls can forward intercom and transferred CO Line calls to a directory number telephone number outside of the System When a call is received the System will access an outgoing CO Line and dial the telephone number entered by the User If a Station assigned Off Net Call Forward receives a call from an internal and or external caller the call will be forwarded to Off Net unconditionally code 8 or after No Answer Ring timer expires code 9 Operation To activate unconditional Off Net Call F
195. erence Description A Station User Supervisor can make a call with intercom Stations and CO Lines The Supervisor uses the CONF button to invite a Station User or CO Line User one by one Connected users can speak and hear with each other at the same time In Multi Line conference up to 15 parties intercom CO Line can enter a conference Up to 12 CO Lines can have a conference with one Intercom Station Unsupervised Conference is a conference in which the originator has left the call and the call continues with the other parties CONFERENCE TYPE DESCRIPTION Conference A Station User can invite internal Stations and CO Lines Multi Line Conference One internal party can invite up to 12 CO Lines Unsupervised Conference When no internal Stations are participating in the conference Paging Conference The second party in the call can page with the originator during paging announcement Add On Conference Supervisor Multi Line Conference Supervisor or or or or or CO CO CO CO CO or CO FIGURE 2 7 ADD ON AND MULTI0LINE CONFERENCE Operation To establish an Add on Conference perform the following 1 During an existing call press the CONF button the call will be put on Hold and the intercom dial tone will be heard 2 Dial the digits to connect the second internal party when the call is answered press the CONF button 3 When all parties have been calle
196. erred to the Station regardless of the DND mode Figure 2 13 5 describes Attendant Override attendant Intercom call transfer etc In DND attendant DND tone In DND attendant override ringing FIGURE 2 13 5 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE Operation To override a Station in DND mode the Attendant can perform the following 1 Press the key or the last digit of the dialed Station number OR 2 Press the programmed CAMP ON flexible button 3 The DND warning tone will be changed to the Intercom ring back tone at the Attendant Station 4 The Attendant can call the Station regardless of the DND mode To assign Camp On to a flexible button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 85 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition If the Attendant overrides a Station in DND sate and the Station has a CO or LOOP button the attendant can transfer the CO call to the Station regardless of the DND mode If the transferred to Station does not have a CO or LOOP button the CO call will be recalled to the Attendant immediately Reference A DND 2 4 8 118 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 13 6 Attendant Recall Description If the recalled CO call is unanswered b the destination Station the CO call will be redirected to the A
197. es the confirmation tone will not be provided and the Fail Ring will disappear refer to the following values 00 wake up fail ring will not disappear automatically 99 the fail ring will not disappear automatically 1 98 after Wake up Fail Ring timer expires the wake up fail ring will disappear automatically Admin programming Wake up Fail Ring Timer PGM 182 FLEX7 2 4 26 Automatic Fax Transfer Description The System will determine if an incoming call from the preprogrammed CO Line is for a FAX or for a Speech terminal by detecting the tone of the call 1100 Hz 0 5s ON 3s OFF repeated When the System detects a FAX tone from the incoming CO Line within the predetermined time the System will transfer the call to the appropriate FAX Station If the FAX tone is not detected within the predetermined time the System will transfer the call to the appropriate Station s Condition Only one CO Line can be programmed as a FAX CO Line if the FAX CO Line is not programmed Automatic Fax Transfer will not be activated Station 106 is used as the FAX Station the FAX machine should be connected to the port for Station 106 to use this feature If the FAX CO Line is not answered within the FAX CO call time the incoming call will be disconnected An outside caller connected to the FAX CO Line will hear a ring back tone while the System is detecting a FAX tone In order to transfer calls from the FAX to a FAX Station
198. estricted to the outgoing CO call time The Call Cut Off Timer is not released when the call is placed on hold or is transferred Admin Programming CO Call Time Restriction PGM 112 FLEX3 Call Cut Off Timer PGM 113 FLEX12 2 2 3 CO Line Queuing Description When a Station User receives a busy tone during an attempt to access a CO Line the User may request a call back queue call The Station will receive a call back when the busy CO Line becomes available Operation To activate CO Line Queuing while receiving a busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Press and release the hook switch if the Station is a SLT 2 Dial 556 refer to Ref A or press the CALLBK button 3 When the confirmation tone is heard replace the handset 4 Once the CO Line becomes idle the call back ring will be received at the Station 5 Lift the handset the CO dial tone should be heard to make a call Condition A CO Line may have any number of queries at one time When the queued CO Line becomes idle or a CO Line becomes available in the group the oldest queued Station will receive the call back A Station can make only one CO Line queuing request at a time If the Station tries to make another CO Line queuing the previous one is canceled and the newer one is activated If the waiting Station is busy and the queued CO Line is available the available CO Line will be directed to the next queued idle Station If t
199. et or press the MON button 2 Dial the parked location to retrieve the parked call Condition To pick up Parked calls a Station should have a CO or LOOP button If a parked call remains unanswered for the duration of the Call Park Recall time the original Station that parked the call will receive a recall ring If the call remains unanswered then the Attendant will receive a recall ring If the Attendant does not answer in the Attendant Recall timer duration the CO Line call will be disconnected and the line will be returned to an idle state Reference A Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Call Park Location PGM 107 FLEX5 Admin Programming Call Park Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX2 2 3 4 Pick up Description A Station User can pick up a call received at another Station The following pick up types are available Directed Call Pick up Allows a User to pick up a call ringing at another Station within the available Intercom Tenancy Group refer to Ref A Group Call Pick up Allows a User to pick up a call ringing at another Station in the same pick up Group Reference B Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 14 PGM 120 2 3 4 1 Directed Call Pick up Description A Station can pickup a call ringing other Station by dialing the Direct Call Pick up code refer to Ref A plus the ringing Station number 37 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation
200. etermines if RBT or MOH will be heard on Transfer ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 17 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 16 CO to CO Transfer CPT ON OFF OFF Determines if CPT will be used to detect tones on CO to CO Transfer 17 ACD Info Print ON OFF OFF Determines if ACD info is available for printing 18 CO to CO Unsupervised Conference Timer Extension ON OFF OFF Determines if the CO to CO Unsupervised Conference Timer can be extended 19 Call Log List Number 15 50 15 Determines the number of calls per Station logged to the Call Log List System Attributes II 1 PX Time Day Month Setting ON OFF OFF Determines if the System Time Day Month is set by the PX Time Day Month 2 Off Hook Ring Signal Type MUST BU RST MUST Determines if the System Off Hook Ring Type can be set to Mute or One Burst Ring 3 Override 1st CO Line Group ON OFF ON Determines if next available CO Line Group can be accessed when 1st CO Line Group is busy 4 Page Warning Tone ON OFF ON Determines if Page Warning Tone is used on Paging 5 Auto Privacy ON OFF ON Determines if calls are protected from Station Override Privilege Admin 113 FLEX4 6 Privacy Warning Tone ON OFF ON Determines if Privacy Warning Tone is heard when call is overridden 7 Single Ring for CO Call YES NO NO ICM Ring cadence 1sec ON 4sec OFF CO Ring cadence 0 4sec ON
201. euing Ring Back Tone RBT If this value is set to RBT Ring Back Tone is provided to the Station when the Station calls a busy Attendant otherwise the hold tone or VMIB MOH Admin 171 FLEX2 is provided FLEX1 1 RBT HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 MOH the Station User will hear MOH hold tone from the System database 1 RBT the Station User will hear a RBT when calling a busy Attendant Station Camp RBT MOH MOH or RBT is heard during the Camp On state FLEX2 1 RBT HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 MOH 1 RBT CO Line Choice When securing a CO Line in a CO Line Group if value is set to LAST CHOICE the last available CO Line will be secured otherwise CO Lines are secured in line availability order FLEX3 1 Round Robin HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 AVAILABLE LINE ORDER 1 LAST CHOICE DISA Retry Counter When the DISA User fails to connect with a Station or access a feature the DISA User can retry other calls or features within the programmed retry counter If the DISA User cannot make a connection FLEX4 4 Retry Counter Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE ICM Continuous Dial Tone Sets whether ICM dial tone is continuous FLEX5 0 Non Continuous HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 NON CONTINUOUS 1 CONTINUOUS CO Dial Tone Detect When speed dial is activated if this value is set to ON the System will detect a dial tone using CPT instead of the pause timer FLEX6 1
202. eviously toll restricted phones The Authorization Code refer to Ref A can be used as a verified Account Code for SMDR refer to Ref B Operation To activate Walking COS from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 23 the confirmation tone should be heard 3 Enter the Authorization Code the Intercom dial tone should be heard and the used extension COS is temporarily changed 4 A CO Line call can be placed one time 79 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To program Walking COS on a flexible button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be programmed 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 23 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition Can be used on DKTU s and SLT s Available on a per use basis only while activating Walking COS hanging up or pressing the TRANS PGM button to hold the call and seize another line the original programmed Station COS will be used When a wrong number is dialed press the FLASH button to dial again without changing to an idle CO Line The fee for a call with Walking COS will be changed according to the Station Authorization Code not the actual Station When a user tries to use Walking COS at a Station set to COS 7 with temporary COS the call will follow the original COS of the Station Referen
203. fer to VALUES FLEX3 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant ring assignment FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 38 PGM 167 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS VMIB Prompt Usage If this value is set to ON and VMIB is available the proper VMIB announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to each Destination FLEX3 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Busy Prompt Usage FLEX2 Error Prompt Usage FLEX3 DND Prompt Usage FLEX4 No Answer Prompt Usage FLEX5 Attendant Transfer Prompt Usage Busy Prompt Usage If this value is set to ON the Busy Announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to the Busy Destination FLEX4 FLEX1 refer to VMIB Prompt Values 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Error Prompt Usage If this value is set to ON an Error Announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to the Error Destination FLEX4 FLEX2 refer to VMIB Prompt Values 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON DND Prompt Usage If this value is set to ON the Busy Announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to the Busy Destination when the original destination is in DND Mode FLEX4 FLEX3 refer to VMIB Prompt Values 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1
204. from the CO Line when one is available FLEX5 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON CO PGM If this value is set to ON the Station User can program a CO button to one of the available Flexible buttons FLEX6 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ADMIN 180 FLEX22 Priority Line Answer PLA If this value is set to ON the Station User can answer calls according to the designated priority FLEX7 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ADMIN 173 Prepaid Call If this value is set to ON the Station User can use the Prepaid Call feature FLEX8 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 10 PGM112 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Speed Dial Access If this value is set to ON the Station User can use the System Speed dial call feature FLEX9 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Two way Record If this value is set to ON the Station User can record the incoming an outgoing voice during a conversation FLEX10 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Fax Mode If this value is set to ON a single ring is provided and Attendant recall is not operated FLEX11 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Off net Call Mode If this value is set to EXT the Station User can only forward CO calls to off net ex mobile phone Otherwise both CO an
205. from the System Attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the system Speed dial bin 4 If desired press the CO Line or Group button 5 Dial the desired phone number and include these special codes up to 24 digits CALLBK Insert Pause key If stored as the first digit its function is Display Security Otherwise its function is Pulse to DTMF switchover DND FOR If CO Dial Tone Detect refer to Ref A is ON and it is stored as the first or second digit and the accessed CO Line is behind the PBX mode its function is Dial Tone Detect Otherwise its function is Pause FLASH Inserts a Flash into the speed number If the accessed CO Line is analog its function is Flash to PX or PBX if the accessed CO Line is ISDN refer to Ref B and it is stored as the first digit it makes the remaining digits sent with envelope information not in the Calling Party number IE but in the keypad facility IE 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button 7 If desired enter the name up to 12 characters by dialing 2 digits for each character refer to Button Map 8 Press the HOLD SAVE button 9 To store continuously repeat this procedure from Step 3 To make a call using the System Speed Dial from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the System Speed Dial bin To make a call
206. g Assignment Description A pre assigned destination receives incoming calls through the CO line The destination refer to Figure 2 1 1 can be a Station Ex 1 Hunt Group ex 2 or VMIB Announcement Ex 3 If a destination station is busy the incoming call returns a muted ring signal so the Station user can pick up the incoming CO call as needed ARIA SOHO Station PSTN Station Hunt Group VMIB announcemen FIGURE 2 1 1 RING ASSIGNMENT DESTINATION Operation Ex 1 When there s an incoming CO call through CO lines 1 8 during Day mode the Stations 100 105 as available will ring instantly If one of the Stations answers the call other Stations stop ringing After 9 seconds if the call is still not answered Station 110 Attendant will ring 1 Set CO Service Type as Normal at the Admin 140 menu item 2 At Admin 144 select CO Line Range 01 08 and press FLEX1 for Day Mode 3 Dial 1 for the Station and enter the Station Range 100105 4 Press 0 to make the Station ring instantly when there is an incoming call 5 To save changes press the HOLD SAVE button 6 Press FLEX1 for Day Mode again without exiting Admin 144 and press 1 for the Station again 7 Enter the Station Range as 110110 and dial 3 as the delay value Press HOLD SAVE again 2 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Ex 2 When there s an incoming CO call through CO l
207. g items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 232 3 Enter the appropriate Speed Zone number Range 01 10 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 232 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Speed Bin Range in Zone The System Speed Bin zone can be grouped up to 10 System Speed zones The system Speed Bin section between 2000 and 2199 is defined as the toll free zone the System Speed dial numbers within this zone are not checked by the toll table FLEX1 VALUE2 Zone Range 220 2499 HOLD SAVE VALUE F1 Zone F2 Station F3 Toll Check F4 Authorization Check Station Range to Access Zone The accessibility of System Speed zones can be assigned to each Station NOTE When there are too many Stations to view scroll data using the volume up down keys FLEX2 VALUE2 Station Number Range 100 157 HOLD SAVE VALUE F1 Zone F2 Station F3 Toll Check F4 Authorization Check Toll Checking If this value is set to ON the Speed dial of this zone is checked by the toll table FLEX3 VALUE2 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUE F1 Zone F2 Station F3 Toll Check F4 Authorization Check 0 OFF 1 ON Authorization Check If this value is set the Station User must enter the value to use the Speed Dial of each System Speed Zone FLEX4 VALUE2 5 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default Not Assigne
208. g per hour CO traffic for the past 24 hours Operation To print the CO Traffic Summary report from the Main Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0128 3 Select Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To print the CO Traffic Hourly report from the Main Attendant Station perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0129 3 Enter the CO group number 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button the report will be printed the following is a sample report 127 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Site Name Report Type CO Group Summary Report Yesterday Total Date 02 12 04 13 15 Peak Hour For All CO 10 00 Grp Num Anal Total Total Inc Out Grp No COs Hour Usage Seize Seize Seize Ovfl ACB FAO 1 62 1319 1050 269 781 0 0 2 14 4 Hardware H W Unit Usage Reports Description The ARIA SOHO System supports the following report to analyze the usage of the Hardware H W unit resources of the System such as the Tone Receiver and VMIB H W Usage Summary report Analysis of whether the System has enough H W unit resources such as the DTMF receiver VMIB and CPTU by showing the statistics The measurement time type can be
209. g sections 1 1 Manual Usage Section 2 Admin Programming Preparation A brief overview to ensure the System is appropriately prepared for Admin Programming More detailed preparation of pre programming is covered in the ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation manual Section 3 Admin Programming This section focuses on Admin Programming for features A brief overview is included that explains the function of each button used for non factory installed functions that need to be programmed using ADMIN More detailed description and operation instructions are included in the ARIA SOHO Feature Description and Operation Manual Section 4 Quick Admin Programming Tables This section provides a quick reference Admin Programming table for use by those familiar with the System ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 2 2 AADDM MIIN N PPRROOGGRRAAM MM MIIN NGG PPRREEPPAARRAATTIIOON N The LDK System can be programmed to meet each customer s individual need Elements of Basic Admin Pre programming should have been covered in the ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Please refer to that manual to ensure the System is prepared for Admin Programming covered in this manual NOTE All programming should be done at Station 100 Station port 00 using LDP 7224D digital key telephone The following Figure 2 0 is provided as a reference during Admin programming It displays the buttons commonly u
210. g to connect a conference pressing the CONF button will return the Supervisor to an Intercom dial tone Admin Programming Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 FLEX6 Multi Line Conference PGM 160 FLEX9 2 7 1 Conference SLT Broker Call A Single Line Telephone SLT User can initiate a 3 way Conference with any combination CO Line or internal users and can alternate between two calls maintaining private conversations with both parties Parties in conference may be internal Stations connected to the networked System or external CO Line calls and may be incoming or outgoing calls Operation To set up a Conference from a SLT perform the following Steps 1 While on a call the SLT User should hook switch the intercom dial tone should be heard and the existing call will be placed on Hold recall timer is activated 2 Place the second call and announce the conference when call is answered 3 SLT User then should hook switch and connect to the first call within 2 seconds hook switch again to establish the Conference with both parties 89 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 7 2 Paging Conference Description During a Page by conference page zone the conference party can page along with the Conference Originator Operation When a Conference Page is being activated perform the following Station User 1 Lift Handset and press the CONF
211. ght COS FLEX2 1 COS Range 1 7 VALUES FLEX1 DAY FLEX2 NIGHT NAVIGATION Next page Volume down key Previous Step CONF button Display Station Number by CO Access Group PGM 131 Station Numbers that access certain CO Line Groups could be checked The LCD shows Stations that are assigned to access CO Line Group 1 01 CO Line Group Range 00 08 HOLD SAVE NAVIGATION Next page Volume down key Previous Step CONF button ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 22 3 2 CO Line PGM 140 146 CO Line features are covered in PGM s 140 to 144 When programming if the programmer enters data correctly the LCD and LED s show he entered data and is stored in the temporary buffer area 3 2 1 CO Service Type PGM 140 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 140 3 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 140 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Normal CO The LCD will show the Stations of a designated Class of Service COS FLEX1 1 HOLD SAVE DISA Service ON FLEX2 FLEX1 FLEX1 Day FLEX2 Night FLEX3 Weekend FLEX4 On Demand FLEX1 FLEX1 DISA Service FLEX2 VMIB HOLD SAVE DISA SUB ATT When value is set to Normal CO DISA service can be used DISA VMIB Announcement
212. gnate port settings and assign baud rate CTS RTS P Break and LLP COM1 FLEX1 FLEX1 7 38400 baud rate HOLD SAVE COM2 MODU Port FLEX3 FLEX1 7 38400 baud rate HOLD SAVE VALUES COM1 COM2 refer to Table FLEX1 FLEX4 refer to Table PORT DESCRIPTION TABLE FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 COM1 Port Setting FLEX1 4 2 COM2 MODU Port Setting PORT SETTING FLEX BUTTON TABLE FLEX ITEM VALUE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Baud rate 0 7 Nortel 19200 0 N A 1 N A 2 1200 Baud 3 2400 Baud 4 4800 Baud 5 9600 Baud 6 19200 Baud 7 38400 Baud 2 CTS RTS ON OFF OFF 3 P Break ON OFF OFF 4 LPP 001 199 060 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 45 3 3 16 Print Port Selection PGM 175 The following Table gives an overview of Printer Port selections PRINT PORT SELECTION OVERVIEW FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Off line SMDR Statistics Print 01 11 COM1 2 ADMIN Print 01 11 COM1 3 Traffic 01 11 COM1 4 SMDI Print 01 11 COM1 5 Call Information 01 11 COM1 6 Info On line SMDR 01 11 COM1 7 Trace 01 11 COM1 8 Debug 01 11 COM1 9 PC Admin 01 11 NET_PCADM 10 PC Attendant 01 11 NET_PCATD 11 CTI 01 11 NET_CTI 12 Remote Diagnostic 01 11 NOT SUPPORTED 01 COM1 02 COM2 MODU 03 TELNET 1 04 TELNET 2 05 TELNET 3 06 RESERVED 07 NET_PCADM 08 NET_PCATD 09 NET_CT
213. has high priority it will receive more incoming calls FLEX19 VALUE 1 digit Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Member Forward If this value is set to ON the Hunt Member cannot receive Hunt Group calls FLEX16 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON DND Timer If this timer expires before a call is received that UCD member will automatically enter the UCD DND state FLEX17 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 64 3 5 4 Ring Group Attributes If the Hunt Group type selected is RING the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 191 3 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS VMIB Announce 1 Timer If the call is not answered during the timer the System will play the VMIB announcement that is programmed FLEX1 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Timer The second VMIB announcement will be played if the call continues to wait beyond the 2nd Announcement Timer FLEX2 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 1 Location Used to play the VMIB announcement when the VMIB Announce 1 Timer expires FLEX3 Seconds Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Location Used to play the VMIB announcement when the VMIB Announce 2 Timer expire
214. he button to record will be played if there already is a recorded message in the number dialed the recorded message will be played 4 Dial to start recording if applicable the announcement Record your message and a confirmation tone will be heard 5 When finished press the HOLD SAVE button OR 6 Press the MON button to finish recording a confirmation tone will be heard To delete a User greeting from a Station perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 66 the User greeting will be deleted and the forward will be deactivated To activate Call Forward to a VMIB Station perform the following Steps 1 Go off hook or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Forward type 1 4 4 Dial the key a confirmation tone will be heard 107 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To deactivate Call Forward from a Station perform the following 1 Press the DND FOR button To leave a Voice Message Wait at a Station perform the following Steps 1 The caller will hear the User greeting and the Record your message announcement 2 After hearing the confirmation tone record the message 3 Hang up to finish recording To retrieve a recorded voice message at the Station perform the following 1 Press the flashing CALLBK button for SLT and 2 8 BTN DKTU dial 557 refer
215. he HOLD SAVE button when all changes have been entered to permanently store data 7 A confirmation tone should be heard when pressing the HOLD SAVE button if all data was entered correctly If there were any errors in the entry then an error tone is presented and data is not stored in the permanent memory ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 4 2 1 2 Resetting the System To reset the System perform the following Steps 1 Enter the PGM number 2 Enter 450 3 Press the FLEX button 4 Enter 15 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button OR 1 Press the PGM button 2 Enter 100 3 Press the FLEX button 4 Press 1 Nation Code Assign to automatically reset the System ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 5 2 2 Pre Programming Pre programming for the following should have been done immediately following Installation of the ARIA SOHO System refer to the Hardware Description and Installation Manual Location PGM Nation Code Site Name Numbering Plans System IP Settings ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 6 3 AADDM MIIN N PPRROOGGRRAAM MM MIIN NGG 3 1 Station PGM110 131 In Station Programming the values of each Station can be customized using program numbers When programming using Station Ranges all Stations within that range will have the same programmed
216. he TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 112 3 Enter the appropriate Station number or Station Range 4 Following the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM112 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS CO Warning Tone Used to restrict outgoing call time If this value is set to ON the Station User will receive a warning tone during a CO call after the timer expires FLEX1 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ADMIN 180 FLEX22 Automatic Hold While seizing a CO Line the Station User secures another CO line by pressing the CO button If this value is set to ON the previous seized CO line will automatically be placed on hold FLEX2 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES Default ON for Station Attendant 0 OFF 1 ON CO Call Time Restriction If this flag is set to ON an outgoing CO call may be disconnected when the CO call restriction timer expires FLEX3 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ADMIN 180 FLEX17 Individual CO Line Access If this value is set to ON the Station User can access an individual CO line by dialing the individual CO access code FLEX4 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ADMIN 107 FLEX8 CO Line Queuing When a User of the Station receives a busy signal during an attempt to access a CO line the User may request a call back queued call when the CO line is available If this value is set to ON the Station User will receive a call back
217. he ROM file is downloading the ARIA SOHO System will erase the previous ROM data and fill the ARIA SOHO ROM area with the new ROM file Condition While upgrading other System features do not work When the ARIA SOHO MPB software upgrade is disconnected before completing the whole process must be redone from the beginning If the ROM files on the PC are invalid the ARIA SOHO MPB software upgrade will not be started The Serial port should be connected to COM port 2 in the MPB Admin Programming RS 232C Port Setting PGM 174 135 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 15 4 Modem Description The ARIA SOHO MBU software can be upgraded through Modem interface by ARIA SOHO upgrade program in remote PC Operation To upgrade using the Modem perform the following Steps 1 Connect the Modem between the ARIA SOHO System and the PC 2 Run the ARIA SOHO PC Upgrade program 3 Select the ARIA SOHO System to be upgraded 4 Click on the OK button 5 Select the port type Modem Connection 6 Click on the Select button 7 Enter the ARIA SOHO Dial number Admin Password and select the path of the binary file 136 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 8 Click the Next button 9 Select the Modem type in the Modem Configuration dialog box 10 Cl
218. he message should rewind according to the VM MSG Rewind timer LDP 7024D SYSTEM PROMPT MESSAGES FIXED NUMBER MESSAGE 071 Reserved 071 Reserved 073 Invalid Number Prompt 074 Time Out Prompt 075 Retry Prompt 076 Transfer to Attendant Prompt 077 Reserved 078 Leave Message Prompt 079 Record Start Prompt 080 Authorization Code Prompt 081 Busy Prompt 082 Reserved 083 Station Off net Forward Prompt 084 DND Prompt 085 No Answer Prompt 086 Reserved 087 Reserved 088 Remote VMIB Control Main Menu Prompt 089 Remote VMIB Sub Menu for Digit 1 in Main Menu 090 Reserved 091 Reserved 092 Reserved 093 Remote VMIB Sub Menu for Digit 2 in Main Menu 094 Remote VMIB Sub Menu for Digit 3 in Main Menu 095 Remote VMIB Sub Menu for Digit in Main Menu 096 Leave Message after Tone Prompt 097 Message Waiting Indication Prompt 098 Default User Greeting Prompt 099 100 Condition System greetings messages are 001 070 by default the User can select on of 70 messages System prompt messages are 071 100 by default the number is the message and the User cannot change the numbering plan arbitrarily but users can also modify those prompts by recording their own messages in the number System greetings and prompts can be recorded only at the System Attendant Station There is no time limit to record System greetings and prompts from the Attendant Station If V
219. he timer the System will play the VMIB announcement that is programmed FLEX1 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Timer The second VMIB announcement will be played if the call continues to wait beyond the 2nd Announcement Timer FLEX2 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 1 Location Used to play the VMIB announcement when the VMIB Announce 1 Timer expires FLEX3 VMIB Announcement Number Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Location Used to play the VMIB announcement when the VMIB Announce 2 Timer expires FLEX4 VMIB Announcement Number Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer Used to repeat the VMIB announce 2 when the timer expires FLEX5 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE VALUES 000 Not Assigned VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Enable Disable Used to enable or disable the VMIB Announce 2 Repeat FLEX6 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 59 PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Overflow Destination Calls to a Station in the group will continue to route until answered or each Station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last Station in the group or will be passed to the overflow Station Group VMIB System Speed Bin after the Overflow Timer expires FLEX7 Destination Type refer to VALUES Ra
220. he waiting Station is idle the queued CO Line will give a call back signal to the Station for 15 seconds If the signal is not received at the Station the queue is canceled and the next Station in the queue will receive the signal 11 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Reference D Message Wait Enable 2 4 15 Admin Programming CO Line Queuing PGM 112 FLEX5 2 2 4 CO Step Call Analog Only Description When an analog Station receives a busy tone after accessing a CO Line the User can dial a CO Line number which has the same first digits as the called busy CO Line without dialing the full number Operation To use CO Step Call when receiving a busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Press the SPEED button and dial the last digit of the previously called number 2 The previous call is terminated and a new call is established 2 2 5 Emergency Call Service Description The User can dial the Emergency Service Code regardless lower Station COS Condition An emergency call can be dialed by pressing an available CO Line at the Station that is assigned to COS 7 If the dialed number for the Emergency Service Code is the same as a Station number on the System or LCR number the call is operated as an Emergency Call The preference of the programmed dial number that is sent to external CO Line is Emergency Call Code gt LCR Table gt Station Number
221. ial if the previous call is LCR applied 16 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 ACNR if the call is LCR applied when activating ACNR Any leading digit string at the LDT Table can be a sub string of another leading digit string such as 012 and 0123 Capacity for LCR Table 3 Day Zones 3 Time Zones Number of Dialed Code Bins 250 bins Number of Modification Code Bins 100 bins Maximum number of Dialed Digits 12 digits Maximum number of Added Digits 25 digits Alternative DMT index 1EA Admin Programming LCR Attributes PGM 220 Leading Digit Table PGM 221 Digit Modification Table PGM 222 LCR Table Initialization PGM 223 2 2 8 Memory Dialing 2 2 8 1 Auto Call Number Redial ACNR Description If call designation is busy or no answer redialing is operated within the ACNR Retry Counter The System will retry the number of times based on programming with appropriate pauses in dialing default 3 times Operation To use ACNR while receiving a busy no answer indication on a CO Line perform the following Steps 1 Press the REDIAL button 2 Replace the handset or go on hook 3 The System will automatically retry the call at programmed intervals 4 When the called party answers lift handset OR 5 Press the MUTE button to make a call To cancel ACNR perform the following 1 Press the flashing REDIAL butt
222. ick on the Start button the ARIA SOHO MPB software download will begin 11 While the ROM file is downloading the ARIA SOHO System will erase the previous ROM data and fill the ARIA SOHO ROM area with the new ROM file Condition When the line is released during the upgrading process dial the phone number again if the line was properly disconnected it will be connected immediately While upgrading other System features do not work When the ARIA SOHO MPB software upgrade is disconnected before completing the whole process must be redone from the beginning If the ROM files on the PC are invalid the ARIA SOHO MPB software upgrade will not be started Admin Programming Modem Assignment ASC Device PGM 170 137 ARIA SOHO ADMIN Programming Manual ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 1 Copyright 2006 LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved This material is copyrighted by LG Nortel Co Ltd LGN Any unauthorized reproductions use or disclosure of this material or any part thereof is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws LGN reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice The information furnished by LGN in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable but is not warranted to be true in all cases LGN and ARIA SOHO are trademarks of LG Nortel Co Ltd All other brand and product names are trademarks or
223. if the call is recognized as a local call and then can be printed as such The default long distance code is NONE FLEX1 VALUE 5 digits HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 69 3 7 LCR PGM 220 223 3 7 1 LCR Attributes PGM 220 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 220 3 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 220 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS CO Line Number Used to select the LCR access mode FLEX1 VALUE Range 1 6 HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 M00 Disable LCR 2 M01 Only Loop LCR 3 M02 Internal and Loop LCR 4 M11 Loop and direct CO LCR 5 M12 Internal Loop and Direct CO LCR 6 M13 Internal Loop and Direct CO and Direct Loop LCR Day Zone Used to set up the LCR settings each day can be grouped up to 3 Zones FLEX2 VALUE Range FLEX1 FLEX7 VALUE2 HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Monday FLEX2 Tuesday FLEX3 Wednesday FLEX4 Thursday FLEX5 Friday FLEX6 Saturday FLEX7 Sunday Value2 Zone1 3 1 digit Time Zone of Day Zone1 Each time of day Zone1 can use different LCR settings each time of day Zone1 can be grouped up to 3 zones The time not belonging to any zone will be Zone1 by default NOTE LDK accepts 24 as00 if input is 24 as the
224. igits Range 01 30 HOLD SAVE ACNR No Tone Retry Counter Determines the number of attempts to secure a CO line for ACNR If a CO line is not secured ACNR will be cancelled FLEX12 VALUE 1 digits Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE Automatic CO Release Timer Uncompleted CO line calls will automatically be released when the timer expires FLEX14 Seconds 3 digits Range 020 255 HOLD SAVE CCR Inter digit Timer Used for the C Cr inter digit timer in the DISA DID CO line In DID type 2 it is used for the DID inter digit timer FLEX15 M Seconds 3 digits Range 000 255 HOLD SAVE CO Call Drop Warning Timer On prepaid CO calls the System will give a warning tone designating the prepaid amount that has been used After the timer expires the call will be disconnected Also used for call drop warning in Unsupervised Conferences FLEX16 M Seconds 3 digits Range 000 255 HOLD SAVE CO Call Restriction Timer If this value is set to 0 the time of outgoing CO calls are not restricted If this value is set to a non zero number outgoing CO calls will be disconnected after the designated time FLEX17 Minutes 2 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE RESERVED CO Dial Delay Timer Used to prevent illegal dialing in case of slow response from the Central Office line or PBX FLEX18 VALUE 100 m sec 2 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE CO Release Guard Timer Designates the amount of
225. ignal 68 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Admin Programming CID Attributes PGM 147 2 4 31 Call Log Description The Call Log feature enables the LDP 7000 series User to view a log of the last 15 50 incoming and outgoing calls The User can scroll the list of numbers stored select the desired number and activate a redial to that number The log includes the CLI or dialed number the time the date and Station System Speed name of the call it is stored on the MPB and is retained if the Station is unplugged or replaced The Call logs for incoming Outgoing Lost calls are available if a flexible button is programmed to be used for CALL LOG Operation To program a Call Log flexible button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Type the Call Log code then press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 57 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button To use the Call Log feature of the LDP 7224D perform the following 1 Press the programmed CALL LOG button 2 The User can scroll through the numbers by pressing the up down navigation buttons to locate received calls dialed calls and lost calls 3 When the CLI of the desired number is displayed press the OK key the System will establish a call to that number 4 Select the Lost Call Menu to view CLI MSG Wait numbers A number in the Lost C
226. ill be maintained in a Busy state after disconnecting a call and placing an outgoing call 10 No Answer Timer 00 99 2 Digits 15 Sec Determines time delay before call is rerouted on No Answer 11 Pilot Hunt ON OFF ON Calls to Hunt Group members will be processed as for the Group 12 Alternative If No Member ON OFF OFF Intercom calls will be dropped CO incoming calls will be routed to Overflow Destination 13 Music Source 00 08 2 digits 00 Not Assigned Caller will hear MOH rather than RBT if programmed 14 Alternate Destination Station Hunt Group Determines reroute destination when all members are busy 15 Maximum Queue Call Count 00 99 2 Digits 99 Determines maximum amount of queued calls allowed for the Group calls received after max is attained will be disconnected 16 Hunt Member Forward ON OFF OFF Determines if Station will receive Hunt calls 17 Queue Count Display ON OFF OFF Determines if the Queue Count will be displayed on the LCD UCD Group 1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000 999 3 Digits 015 Sec VMIB Announcement played on No Answer Admin PGM191 FLEX3 2 VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000 999 3 Digits 000 Sec 2nd VMIB Announcement played on No Answer Admin PGM191 FLEX4 191 3 VMIB Announce 1 Location 00 70 2 Digits 00 Not Assigned VMIB Announcement played when timer expires ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 200
227. ines 1 8 during Night mode the Hunt Group starts to ring The ringing Station is decided by the Hunt Group type refer to Ref A 1 Verify the CO Service Type is set to Normal at Admin 140 2 Check if Hunt Group 620 is assigned properly at Admin 190 3 At Admin 144 select CO Range 01 08 and press FLEX2 Night Mode 4 Dial 2 for the Hunt Group Number 620 5 To save changes press the HOLD SAVE button Ex 3 When there s an incoming CO call through CO lines 1 8 during Weekend mode the VMIB announcement played If the key is pressed the line will be released 1 Check if CO Service Type is set to Normal at Admin 140 2 Check if VMIB Announcement is 01 is recorded properly at the System Attendant Station refer to Ref B 3 At Admin 144 select CO Line Range 01 08 and press FLEX3 for Weekend mode 4 Dial 3 for VMIB and enter the VMIB announcement number 01 5 To make the CO Line release after VMIB announcement press the key 6 Save the changed setting my pressing the HOLD SAVE button Condition Any CO Line Ring Assignment can be programmed for multiple Stations And each ring to Station can be delayed by Admin programming The ring assignment is individually applied to ring modes Day Night Weekend or On Demand refer to Ref C Every CO Line must be assigned to an Attendant Station by default Ref D To receive incoming CO Line calls the DKTU should have a CO or LOOP button R
228. ing CO Call Time Restriction If this value is set to ON the conversation time of an incoming CO call is limited After the CO Call Restriction Timer expires the call is forced to disconnect FLEX19 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 11 PGM112 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Forced Station Account Code If this value is set to ON a password is needed to access an outgoing CO line FLEX20 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON CID Type 2 Service not available in ARIA SOHO If this value is set to ON a busy Station can receive additional CID information from an analog PSTN line FLEX21 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Door Open If this value is set to ON the programmed Station can open a designated door by dialing the assigned Door Open Code FLEX22 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Dummy Station If this value is set to ON a designated Station can be used as a dummy station so a hot desk agent can login at that location FLEX23 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Emergency Supervisor If this value is set to ON the Station can intrude on other Stations in the event of an emergency An Authorized User Emergency Supervisor can disconnect another extension s active CO Line call and then make an outgoing call on the released line
229. ion a confirmation tone should be heard 2 Replace the handset 3 When the receiving Station returns to an idle state the Station leaving the message will receive an intercom ring 4 When the intercom call is answered the Call Back request will be removed To leave a Message Wait at a SLT perform the following Steps 1 Hook flash 2 Dial 556 refer to Ref A a confirmation tone should be heard 3 Replace the handset To answer the Message Wait perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset an indication tone should be heard 2 Dial 557 refer to Ref B 3 The Station leaving the message will receive an Intercom ring NOTE If a voice message is recorded on a SLT the recorded message will be played by dialing the Message Wait Retrieval code 557 The played message will be deleted automatically after being played When more than one message is recorded after the first message a warning tone will be heard to indicate remaining messages To retrieve another message dial 557 again The Call Back will ring according to the Tone mode regardless of Intercom Signaling mode refer to Ref C 54 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To queue a Call Back on a busy SLT perform the following 1 Hook flash 2 Dial 556 while the busy tone is being heard 3 Confirmation tone should be heard replace the handset 4 When the SLT returns
230. ion COS to determine the restriction The weekend COS is the same as night COS FLEX1 DAY 02 COS FLEX2 NIGHT 02 COS Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default 1 for all Stations day and night operation FLEX1 DAY FLEX2 NIGHT STATION COS TABLE STATION COS REMARK 1 No restrictions are placed at the Station for dialing 2 The assignments in the Exception Table A are monitored for Allow and Deny numbers 3 The assignments in the Exception Table B are monitored for Allow and Deny numbers 4 The assignments in both Exception Tables A amp B are monitored for Allow and Deny numbers 5 The leading digit dialed can no t be a long distance code The dialed digits can be longer than 7 digits There is not restriction for the number in the Canned Toll Table 6 The leading digits can not be a Long distance code Only eight digits maximum can be dialed There is no restriction for the number in the Canned Toll Table 7 Intercom and paging calls are allowed No dialing allowed on CO lines ICM boxes are assigned with this COS 8 The assignments in the Exception Table C are monitored for allow and deny numbers 9 The assignments in the Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 17 3 1 8 CO Line Group Access PGM 117 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM
231. itch 4 is ON the System will detect the logical slot assignment in sequence and increase the order automatically If the DIP Switch 4 is OFF the logical slot assignment must be entered at each board type After manual logical slot assignment User should reset the System manually NUMBERING PLAN TYPE PGM ITEM STATION RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Number Set Type 1 100 151 The 1st digit of the Station number should be 1 4 Number Set Type 2 100 151 The Station number can be changed up to 799 Number Set Type 3 100 151 Number Set Type 4 700 751 Number Set Type 5 200 251 Number Set Type 6 10 61 Number Set Type 7 100 151 04 Number Set Type 8 100 151 Type 1 The Station number can be changed up to 999 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 8 Flexible Numbering Plan PGM FLEX FIELD NUMBER SET 1 NUMBER SET 2 NUMBER SET 3 NUMBER SET 4 NUMBER SET 5 NUMBER SET 6 NUMBER SET 7 NUMBER SET 8 REMARK 105 Intercom Call 100 151 100 151 100 151 700 751 200 251 10 61 100 151 100 151 1 Group Pilot Number 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 2 Internal Page Zone 501 510 501 510 01 10 01 10 01 10 501 510 401 410 501 510 3 Internal all call Page 543 543 5 7 5 543 43 543 4 Meet Me Page 544 544 544 44 544 5 External Page zo
232. ithin the Intercom Tenancy Group a Station cannot pickup a call that does not belong to the same Intercom tenancy Group refer to Ref C Reference A Pick up Attribute 2 3 4 B Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Group Call Pick up Code PGM 107 FLEX2 C Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 14 Admin Programming Pick up Attribute PGM 190 FLEX2 Pick up Group Attributes PGM 191 PLA Priority Setting Pick up Priority PGM 173 39 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 Call Handling 2 4 1 Absent Text Message 2 4 1 1 Custom Message Description Each Station can select from ten 11 20 available custom messages to display on the DKTU LCD These messages are programmed by the System Attendant refer to Ref A for System wide use Individual Users may program message 00 as their own custom message When set the selected message is displayed on the User Station LCD panel Operation To program Custom Message 00 from a Station perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 52 Ref B 3 Enter the message refer to Figure 2 4 1 1 up to 24 characters Q 11 Z 12 13 1 10 A 21 B 22 C 23 2 20 D 31 E 32 F 33 3 30 G 41 H 42 I 43 4 40 J 51 K 52 L 53 5 50 M 61 N 62 O 63 6 60 P 71 Q 72 R 73 S 74 7
233. its 4 Gateway Address 12 Digits 5 Subnet Mask 12 Digits 255 255 255 0 108 6 PPP Usage ON OFF OFF Skip Expanded Flexible Numbering Plan PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 4 Conference Room Max 8 Digits 57 5 SLT Conference Page Max 8 Digits 58 109 6 US Conference Timer Max 8 Digits Station ID Assignment PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Station ID 01 13 110 2 DSS DLS Map Associate STA Station Attributes I II III PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Auto Speaker Selection ON OFF ON Access CO Line or make DSS call 2 Call Forward ON OFF ON Forward incoming call 3 DND ON OFF ON Denies incoming calls 4 Data Line Security ON OFF OFF Prohibits Camp On and Override when line is busy 5 Howling Tone to SLT ON OFF ON Noisy Error tone when continuous off hook without activity 6 ICM Box Signaling ON OFF OFF Determines receipt of ICM Box Signaling 7 No Touch Answer ON OFF ON Determines automatic Station connection of transferred CO calls 8 Page Access ON OFF ON Determines ability to page Stations on the System 9 Ring Type 0 4 0 Determines ICM Ring Type received at Called Party Station 10 Speaker Ring 1 Speaker 2 Headset 3 Both Speaker Determines Ringing Path for incoming calls 111 11 Speakerphone ON OFF ON Determines speakerphone function availability ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN
234. ization Codes can be programmed on the System Duplicate Authorization Codes can not be assigned to more than one Station If Loop LCR ACNT is set on a Station the Authorization Code is required when the Station dials the Loop LCR CO Access code refer to Ref A Reference A LCR 2 2 7 75 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Admin Programming Authorization Code Table PGM 227 DISA Authorization Code PGM 141 CO Line Group Account PGM 141 Loop LCR Account Code PGM 111 5 Digit Authorization Code PGM 161 2 5 3 Automatic Call Release Description When a Station does not initiate dialing on an outgoing CO Line in a reasonable amount of time or receives no answer on an Intercom call the System will disconnect the call based on the assigned Auto Release Timer PGM 180 FLEX14 If the User Station is in Speak phone or MON mode the Station will automatically return to idle Otherwise the Station will receive an error tone if using the Handset Condition Intercom call in H F mode refer to Ref A is considered answered Station Auto Release will not be activated When Automatic Call Release time is assigned to 0 Auto Call Release is not activated While making a call without lifting the Handset and the Automatic Call Release timer expires the call will be cancelled and the Station will return to an idle state automatically While making a call u
235. l Dialing Table Defines the interface for dialing between the LDK and the external VM device VALUE Range 1 9 refer to Table VALUE2 Range 1 2 refer to VALUES Prefix Suffix Code Up to 12 digits HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 PREFIX 2 SUFFIX VOICE MAIL DEFAULT TABLE DIGIT ITEM VALUE DEFAULT REMARK 1 VM Table 1 Prefix P Suffix Put Mail 2 VM Table 2 Prefix P Suffix Get Mail 3 VM Table 3 Prefix P 3P Suffix Busy Table 4 VM Table 4 Prefix P 4P Suffix No Answer Table 5 VM Table 5 Prefix P 5P Suffix Error Table 6 VM Table 6 Prefix P 6P Suffix DND Table 7 VM Table 7 Prefix Suffix 8 VM Table 8 Prefix Suffix 9 VM Table 9 Disconnect Table ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 85 3 10 Other Tables 3 10 1 Nation Specific PGM 400 423 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DTIB RX Gain 1 DTIB DKT 00 63 26 2 DTIB SLT 00 63 22 3 DTIB RESERV 00 63 30 4 DTIB RESERV 00 63 26 5 DTIB ACO 00 63 22 6 DTIB RESERV 00 63 26 7 DTIB RESERV 8 DTIB VMIB 00 63 29 9 DTIB DTMF 00 63 8 10 DTIB TONE 00 63 32 11 DTIB MUSIC1 00 63 29 12 DTIB RESERV 400 13 DTIB RESERV SLIB RX Gain 1 SLIB DKT 00 63 32 2 SLIB SLT 00 63 32 3 SLIB RESERV 00 63 4 SLIB RESERV 00 63 5 SLIB ACO 00 63 32 6 SLIB RESERV 00 63 7 SLIB
236. l Forward PGM 121 13 SLT DTMF Release Timer 00 20 2 Digits 00 Sec Determines time delay before DTMF Receiver is released on an SLT call 14 3 Soft Auto Release Timer 01 30 2 Digits 05 Sec Determines time delay before DTMF Receiver is returned to an idle state 15 VM Pause Timer 01 90 2 Digits 30 100ms Determines time delay before in band digit stream is sent to an external VM 16 Transit Connect Timer 1 30 04 Determines time delay before Master System sends a connect message to a Slave system when the transit out CO Type is Pulse 17 VMIB Message Forward Rewind 1 99 05 Sec Determines time delay before VMIB messages are rewound 181 18 CO Line Connect Timer 0 20 0 sec Determines the time delay before System recognizes the CO Line as connected CIS Only ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 24 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 19 CO Line CPT Detect Timer 0 20 5 sec Determines the time delay used to check status after a CO Line is connected to activate CO CO Transfer CPT Detect PGM 160 FLEX16 should be set to ON 1 SLT Hook Switch Bounce Timer 01 25 2 Digits 01 100ms Determines the time delay needed to detect an on or off hook state for SLT 2 SLT Maximum Hook flash timer 001 250 3 Digits 06 10ms Determines maximum time necessary to detect a hook flash for SLT 3 SLT Minimum Hook Flash
237. l Page music 1 Assignment Cancel Attendant 079 Prepaid Call 07 LCD Display Language FLEXIBLE BUTTON PROGRAMMING CODES FUNCTION CODE ITEM REMARK 11 Differential Ring 21 Station COS Down 22 Station COS Restore 23 Walking COS 31 Authorization Code Registration 32 Authorization Code Change 41 Wake Up Time Registration One time Continuous 42 Wake up Time Cancel 51 Pre Selected MSG Activation 52 Set Custom Message 53 CLIR Key 54 Two Way Recording 56 Attendant Camp On Queue BTN Assignment Attendant 57 Call Log Display 61 Record VMIB User Greeting 64 Listen VMIB Station Status 66 Erase VMIB User Greeting 71 LCD Display Mode English Domestic Language 73 Background Music 74 Station User Name Registration 76 Headset Ring Mode 80 Account Code Activation 83 ICM Hold BTN Assignment 84 LOOP BTN Assignment 85 Camp On BTN Assignment 86 INTRUSION BTN Assignment System Attendant 87 UCD DND BTN Assignment Hunt Group Number 8 ACD STATUS BTN Assignment 91 CONF BTN Assignment 2 8 BTN Keyset 92 CALLBK BTN Assignment 2 8 BTN Keyset 93 DND FWD BTN Assignment 2 8 BTN Keyset 94 FLASH BTN Assignment 2 8 BTN Keyset 95 MUTE BTN Assignment 2 8 BTN Keyset 96 MON BTN Assignment 2 8 BTN Keyset 97 REDIAL BTN Assignment 2 8 BTN Keyset 98 DID Restriction 99 DISA Restriction 9 Call Recording via
238. l will be disconnected To extend call duration perform the following Steps 1 Dial the unsupervised conference timer extension code number and the extension line multiple digit data 1 9 2 The ARIA SOHO System will re assign the unsupervised conference timer to the multiple of the entered digits 3 Ex The unsupervised conference timer is set to 10 minutes and the entered digit is 3 then the timer will be extended to 30 minutes Condition To use this feature at least one IDLE DTMF device must exist This feature is only available on analog CO to CO calls using DISA or off net call forward Admin Programming Unsupervised Conference Timer Extend Enable PGM 160 FLEX18 Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Unsupervised Conference timer Extend Code PGM 109 FLEX6 Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 FLEX6 2 4 28 Forced Hands Free Mode Description A DKTU caller can temporarily change the answering mode of the called party DKTU from Tone mode to Hands Free mode Operation To activate Forced Hands Free mode perform the following Steps 1 During a tone mode call to a DKTU when the user hears a ring back tone dial the Forced Hands Free code number 2 The called DKTU will stop ringing and the Speaker and Microphone will be activated Operate and Hands Free mode 66 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006
239. laced in Call Park will recall at Station 3 Camp On Recall Timer 000 200 3 digits 030 Sec Determines the amount of time a call Camp On at a busy Station before recalling at the Transferring Station 4 Exclusive Hold Recall Timer 000 030 3 Digits 060 Sec Determines the amount of time a call will be held before recalling at Station 5 I Hold Recall Timer 000 300 3 Digits 030 Sec Determines the amount of time a recalled call will attempt a connection before recalling at the Attendant Station 6 System Hold Recall Timer 000 300 3 digits 030 Sec Determines the amount of time before a call on System Hold will recall at a Station 7 Transfer Recall Timer 000 300 3 Digits 030 Sec Determines the amount of time before a call on being transferred will recall 8 ACNR Delay Timer 000 300 3 Digits 030 Sec Determines the amount of time delay exists following ACNR Pause Timer expiration before ACNR is activated 9 ACNR No Answer Timer 10 50 2 Digits 30 Sec Determines the amount of time on No Answer before call is disconnected 10 ACNR Pause Timer 005 300 3 Digits 005 Sec Determines the amount of time delay exists before ACNR is activated 11 ACNR Retry Counter 01 30 10 Determines the amount of time System will retry before ACNR is canceled 12 ACNR No Tone Retry Counter 1 9 1 Digit 3 Determines the amount of time System will attempt to secure a CO Line before ACNR is canc
240. laced on I Hold while dialing on a CO Line exists the dialing will not be transmitted Reference A Hold Preference 2 3 3 2 B Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual System Hold Code PGM 106 FLEX20 C Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Held Individual CO Line Code PGM 107 FLEX11 D Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Access Held CO Group Code PGM 107 FLEX10 Admin Programming Hold Preference PGM 160 FLEX8 Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX1 Exclusive Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX4 System Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX6 Transfer Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX7 35 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 3 3 2 Hold Preference Description Preferred Hold type is set by Admin Programming When a User presses the HOLD button the preferred type of hold is activated If the User presses the HOLD button twice the other type is activated toggle Operation If System Hold is set as preferred Hold and the User presses the HOLD button once while on a call the call is placed on System Hold refer to Ref A If System is set as preferred Hold and the User presses the HOLD button twice while on a call the call is placed on Exclusive Hold refer to Ref A When Exclusive Hold is activated the call cannot be accessed by another
241. ld FLEX4 Seconds 3 digits Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE I Hold Timer When a recalled call is not answered it will recall to the Attendant after the designated timer expires FLEX5 Seconds 3 digits Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE System Hold Recall Timer Designates the amount of time before a call placed on System Hold will recall at the Station that placed the call on Hold FLEX6 Seconds 3 digits Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE Transfer Recall Timer Designates the amount of time a transferred call will ring at a transferred to Station and how long it will recall at the transferring Station FLEX7 Seconds 3 digits Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE ACNR Delay Timer Designates the time delay when there is no available CO Line in the group FLEX8 Seconds 3 digits Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE ACNR No Answer Timer The System will detect a CO ring back tone at the CO party If the call is not answered the system will disconnect the call FLEX9 Seconds 2 digits Range 00 50 HOLD SAVE ACNR Pause Timer When the ACNR Pause Timer expires ACNR is activated FLEX10 Seconds 3 digits Range 005 300 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 52 PGM 180 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS ACNR Retry Counter ACNR is executed up to the value designated After the timer expires the ACNR service is cancelled FLEX11 VALUE 2 d
242. le hearing a message dial the Station number to be transferred to 2 The message will be transferred to the desired Station Condition If a transferring Station is empty the User will hear an error tone and can retry sending to another Station within 3 seconds A SLT with a message wait lamp can also transfer VMIB messages The transferred Station should have VMIB access A User can add an additional voice message when transferring a voice message to another Station available on the LDP 7224D with Soft Buttons Admin Programming VMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX2 2 11 7 VMIB Message with CLI Description When an outside caller leaves a message the CLI is saved with the message The CLI will be displayed while hearing the message and the Station User can use the CLI to return the call Operation To transfer a message to another Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the CALLBACK Soft Button while listening to the message and viewing the related CLI 2 The System will dial the displayed CLI automatically Condition This feature is available on DKTUs with 3 soft buttons The VMIU message will not be deleted when the User uses the CLI to returns the call 110 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 12 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description The ARIA SOHO System Station Message Detail Recording SMDR provides detailed informatio
243. ller hangs up before answer And incoming call placed on hold state and cleared down in hold state R Direct call DID to a station but the call was disconnected before the station answers Or direct call to station A but station A does not answer and the call was forwarded to station B The call was disconnected before station B answers Operation To print the Lost Call count of record perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0117 from the Attendant Station 3 The Lost Call count of record will be printed in the PC connected to the System To clear the Lost Call count of record perform the following 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 0118 from the Attendant Station The Lost Call count is cleared will display and the Lost Call count will restart Condition The SMDR record is sent to the RS 232C automatically as soon as the event takes place The SMDR record for Lost Call is not saved Only records are counted To activate SMDR record the SMDR field must be set in Admin Programming Reference A Hunt Group 2 6 Admin Programming SMDR Print Enable PGM 117 FLEX2 Long Distance All Call Record PGM 177 FLEX3 Print Lost Call PGM 177 FLEX6 113 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 13 Attendant Service Description An Attendant controls the incoming calls by transferring calls a
244. lls Messages remain at the last available Secretary Station Reference A DND 2 4 9 B Camp On 2 4 5 C Call Transfer 2 3 2 D Call Forward 2 3 1 Admin Programming Do Not Disturb PGM 111 FLEX3 Executive Secretary Table PGM 229 2 9 2 Linked Pair Station Description Two Stations can be linked with each other by programming Linking with another Station the User can use them alternatively Figure 2 9 2A describes that if two linked Stations in a Linked Pair are idle and a CO call arrives both Stations will ring The next Figure shows that if one Linked Pair Station is busy and a new CO call arrives the caller will hear the busy tone STA 110 STA 210 Linked Pair STA 110 STA 110 CO LINE When the linked stations are idle Call to STA 110 96 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 FIGURE 2 9 2A LINKED PAIR IDLE STATUS When the linked stations are busy CO LINE STA 110 STA 110 Busy state Call to STA 110 gt Busy Tone FIGURE 2 9 2B LINKED PAIR BUSY STATUS Operation If one of two linked Stations receives an Intercom incoming CO call DISA recall ring System or Exclusive Hold Transfer then the other linked Station will receive the call refer to Ref A B If one Station if a Linked Pair is in DND or call forward or pre selected message mode refer to Ref D E then the linked S
245. m supports System prompts 072 100 basically Users may use their own prompts by recording the prompts at the Attendant Station Admin Programming VMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX2 VMIB User Record Timer PGM 181 FLEX3 VMIB Valid User Message Timer PGM 181 FLEX4 Station Group Assignment and Attributes PGM 190 191 2 11 2 Remote Control Description An outside caller through DISA refer to Ref A can access VMIB after calling a Station which is in VMIB Forward mode Entering VMIB controlling mode the user can retrieve received messages change user greeting release Call Forward to VMIB etc Operation To enter VMIB Remote Control mode perform the following Steps 1 Dial the Station number forwarded to VMIB from an external party with DISA the User greeting should be heard 2 While the User greeting is playing press the key the announcement Enter your password should be heard 3 Enter the password authorization code and press the key if authorization is longer than 5 digits the key is not needed 4 A message should be heard describing the number of messages present in the inbox 5 Press the desired number refer to values 1 Retrieve voice messages 2 Listen or change user greeting 3 Release Call forward to VMIB mode Exit VMIB Remote Control mode 103 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To listen to re
246. mary System Attendant 0122 Print All Periodically System Attendant 0123 Abort Periodic Printing System Attendant 0124 Print ATD Traffic System Attendant 0125 Print Call Summary System Attendant 0126 Print All Hourly System Attendant 0127 Print H W Usage System Attendant 0128 Print CO Summary System Attendant 0129 Print CO Hourly System Attendant 021 Station COS Down COS 7 Attendant 022 Station COS Restore Attendant 031 Authorization Code Cancel System Attendant 041 System Date Time Setting Attendant 042 Wake Up Time Registration One Time Continuous Attendant 043 Wake Up Time Cancel System Attendant 044 LCD Date Mode Change System Attendant 045 LCD Time Mode Change System Attendant 046 Use Network Time amp Date System Attendant 047 Monitor Conference Room Attendant 051 Pre Select MSG Activation Attendant 052 Pre Select MSG Deactivation Attendant 053 Custom Display Message Program 11 20 System Attendant 054 Erase VM MSG Attendant 06 Record VMIB Greeting System Attendant 071 DND Call Forward Pre Selected MSG Cancel Attendant 072 Register Station Name Attendant 073 Disable CO Outgoing System Attendant 074 Automatic Day Night Weekend Mode Program Attendant 075 ICM Box BGM Channel Select Attendant ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 4 FUNCTION CODE ITEM REMARK 076 Externa
247. mber by COS 1 Show Station by Assigned Day COS 130 2 Show Station by Assigned Night COS 131 Display Station Number by CO Access Group 1 8 CO Service Type 1 CO Type 1 Normal DISA Sub Attribute DISA Service ON ON OFF OFF 140 2 DISA VMIB Announcement 00 70 00 Not Assigned CO Line Attributes I 1 9 1 CO Line Group Assignment 0 9 1 Each CO Line must be assigned to a CO Line Group according to COS and CO Type NOTE 00 Private Group Group 9 2 CO Line COS 1 5 1 3 DISA Account Code ON OFF OFF Incoming caller must enter an Account Code to access another DISA CO Line 4 CO Line Assign POL LOOP LOOP Polarity Reverse or Loop Start 5 CO Line Type PBX CO CO Determines if opposite System is PBX or Central Office CO 6 CO Line Signal Type DTMF PUL SE DTMF Determines if CO Line signal is DTMF or Pulse 7 Flash Type GROUND LOOP LOOP Analog CO Line Only 8 Universal Night Answer UNA ON OFF OFF Determines if UNA is available on System CO Lines 9 CO Line Group Account ON OFF OFF Must enter CO Line Access Code 141 10 CO Tenancy Group 0 5 0 Determines Day Night Ring Mode for Stations belonging to each CO Tenancy Group CO Line Attributes II 1 13 142 1 CO Line Name Display ON OFF OFF CO Line Name displayed for incoming CO Line calls ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 15 PGM FLEX ITE
248. ment will be ignored When the number of queued incoming calls is over the pre defined amount in a UCD Group incoming calls will be dropped Pick Up Hunt Group is reserved for Intercom calls only ISDN phones can be a member of a Hunt Group but will only work when answering a hunt Group call Group pick up doesn t work with a call of Hunt Group pilot number an error tone will be presented ISDN phones can not be the first Hunt Group member two ISDN phones can not be entered in a Hunt Group Reference A Recording System VMIB Announcement 2 11 1 B ICM Box Music Selection 2 13 10 Admin Programming Hunt Group PGM 190 Hunt Group Attribute PGM 191 82 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 6 1 Terminal Group Description Calls to a Station in the Group or a pilot number will go to the first Station in the Group If unanswered or unavailable the call proceeds to the next listed Station in the Group The call will continue to be rerouted until reaching the last Station in the Group where the call will remain or can be sent to overflow Station or Group A Terminal Hunt Group can be assigned with a pilot number Hunt Group number and only calls to the pilot number will hunt CO LINE 2 1st Hunt Group Call 2nd Hunt Group Call STA110 STA111 STA112 STA113 STA115 STA114 CO LINE 1 FIGURE 2 6 2 TERMINAL G
249. mer by dialing the UC Timer Extend code FLEX18 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Call Log List Number Sets the number of Call Log Lists per Station FLEX19 2 digits Range 15 50 HOLD SAVE 3 3 2 System Attributes II PGM 161 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 161 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 161 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS PX Time Day Month Setting If this value is set to ON the System Time Date is set by the PX Time Day Month FLEX1 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Off Hook Ring Type The off hook ring type in the System can be set to mute or a one burst ring FLEX2 0 BURST HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 BURST 1 MUTE Override 1st CO Line Group If this value is set to ON when there is no available CO Line in the first CO Line Group the System can access the next accessible CO Line Group FLEX3 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Page Warning Tone If this value is set to ON a page warning tone will be heard when paging starts FLEX4 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 33 PGM 161 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Auto Privacy If this value is set to ON a call is protected from override regardless of Station Override P
250. min Programming Stop Camp On Tone PGM 112 FLEX 15 Voice Over PGM 113 FLEX6 voice over also applies to SLT 2 4 6 Change Ring Type Description The ring tone used to notify Stations of an incoming call can be changed using Admin Programming to provide distinctive ringing on a per CO Line basis A distinctive ring tone can be programmed for each CO Line that is used to ring each Station BUTTON CONFIGURATION FOR DISTINCT RING FREQUENCY PGM 422 FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Ring 1 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific 2 Ring 2 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific 3 Ring 3 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific 4 Ring 4 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Admin Programming CO Distinct Ring PGM142 FLEX5 Ring Frequency PGM 422 46 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 7 Dialing Security Description The dialed phone number may not be displayed on the LCD of the called Station when calling with a speed dial number refer to Ref A Operation To activate Dialing Security for calling with a speed dial number perform the following Steps NOTE If the button is pressed in front of the first digit of the speed dial number dialing security is activated 1 Lift the Handset or press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press SPEED button 3 Dial speed bin number 4 Press button 5 Dial tele
251. mmed over all CO groups Group Number A number identifying each CO group associated with the displayed data Group numbers displayed in numeric order beginning with the lowest number and continuing to the highest one Number of CO The number of CO Lines in the group Analysis Start Hour The time 24 hour mode when the System begins taking the measurement Total Usage Total usage for all CO Lines in the CO group it represents the total time that the CO Lines are busy during the measurement period Total usage measures each time when a CO Line is secured for use by an incoming or outgoing call Total Attempt The number of incoming and outgoing call attempts in the CO group Incoming Attempt The number of incoming call attempts in the CO group Outgoing Attempt The number of outgoing call attempts in the CO group Group Overflow The number of calls offered to a CO group that are not carried calls rejected based on authorization will not be included Percentage All CO Busy The percentage of time that all CO Lines in the CO group are simultaneously in use during the time interval Percentage Fail to Attempt Outgoing The percentage of offered calls that are not carried on the CO group unauthorized calls denied by the CO group and uncompleted calls carried by the CO group unanswered calls will not be included CO Traffic Hourly report Analysis of CO traffic patterns by showin
252. n Check Determines if Account Code Admin PGM232 FLEX5 access will be checked Weekly Time Table 1 7 1 Day Start Time 0900 2 Night Start Time 1800 233 3 Weekend Start Time 0000 2359 Ring Assignment Admin PGM144 Voice Mail Dial Table 1 9 1 Prefix Index 234 2 Suffix Index 12 Digits Determines the interface for dialing commands between LDK and external VM device NATION SPECIFIC PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DTIB RX Gain 00 63 1 DTIB DKT 00 63 26 2 DTIB SLT 00 63 22 3 DTIB RESERV 00 63 22 4 DTIB RESERV 00 63 26 5 DTIB ACO 00 63 22 6 DTIB RESERV 00 63 7 DTIB RESERV 8 DTIB VMIB 00 63 29 9 DTIB DTMF 00 63 8 10 DTIB TONE 00 63 32 400 11 DTIB MUSIC1 00 63 29 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 31 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 12 DTIB MUSIC2 00 63 29 13 DTIB RESERV SLIB RX Gain 1 SLIB DKT 00 63 32 2 SLIB SLT 00 63 32 3 SLIB RESERV 00 63 12 4 SLIB RESERV 00 63 12 5 SLIB ACO 00 63 32 6 SLIB RESERV 00 63 7 SLIB RESERV 8 SLIB VMIB 00 63 40 9 SLIB DTMF 00 63 28 10 SLIB TONE 00 63 38 11 SLIB MUSIC1 00 63 40 12 SLIB MUSIC2 00 63 40 401 13 SLIB RESERV ACOB RX Gain 1 ACOB DKT 00 63 28 2 ACOB SLT 00 63 32 3 ACOB RESERV 00 63 27 4 ACOB RESERV 00 63 26 5 ACOB ACO 00 63 36 6 A
253. n PGM190 191 7 Reserved 8 System Timer Database Initialization PGM180 182 9 Toll Table Database Initialization PGM224 225 10 LCR Database Initialization PGM220 222 11 Tables Initialization PGM227 229 232 235 12 Flexible Button Program Initialization PGM115 14 All Database Initialization Above All 450 15 System Reset by Software ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 34 Print Port Database PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Print Port Database 1 Flexible Numbering Plan Print 2 Station Database Print STN_R 3 CO Line Database Print CO_R 4 System Feature Database Print 5 Station Group Database Print 7 System Timer Database Print 8 Toll Table Database Print 9 LCR Database Print 10 Other Tables Print 11 Nation Specific Database Print 12 Flexible Button Program Print STN R 14 All Database Print 15 LCD Message Print 1 Language 00 12 Nation Specific 00 ENG 01 ITA 02 FIN 03 DUT 04 SWE 05 DAN 06 NOR 07 HUN 08 GER 09 FRE 10 POR 11 SPA 12 KOR 2 Station Type 0 2 0 0 NORMAL 1 LG GAP 2 LARGE 451 16 Quit Print
254. n about both incoming and outgoing calls SMDR is programmable to record all calls or just outgoing long distance calls information includes outgoing CO Line dialed number time date Station that answered the call duration of call and more Authorization codes may be entered and recorded The Figure 2 12 1 describes that the ARIA SOHO System PC and the Attendant Station are all elements of SMDR The ARIA SOHO System connects with the Attendant through DKTU port and with the PC through the RS 232C FIGURE 2 12 SMDR CONNECTION Operation To print the SMDR perform the following Steps 1 Activate the PC utility program on a networked PC 2 Connect the serial port of MPB to the serial port of the PC with the RS 232C cable 3 At the Attendant Station Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 0111 Station base or 0113 Group base Enter the Station or Group range 4 The SMDR will print to the PC To delete a SMDR perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0116 Condition There is an assignable SMDR record option PGM 177 FLEX3 If SMDR Long Distance Only is selected only outgoing CO Calls will be printed If SMDR All Call is selected incoming and outgoing local and long distance calls are printed except the SMDR Local Code PGM 204 If the user dials any number with a programmed long distance code as the first and second digit dialed or any number with more than maxim
255. nction is Display Security Otherwise its function is Pulse to DTMF switchover DND FOR If CO Dial Tone Detect refer to Ref A is ON and it is stored as the first or second digit and the accessed CO Line is behind the PBX mode its function is Dial Tone Detect Otherwise its function is Pause FLASH Inserts a Flash into the speed number If the accessed CO Line is analog its function is Flash to PX or PBX if the accessed CO Line is ISDN refer to Ref B and it is stored as the first digit it makes the remaining digits sent with envelope information not in the Calling Party number IE but in the keypad facility IE 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button 7 If desired enter the name max 12 characters using the 2 digit code for each character 8 To store continuously repeat this procedure from Step 3 To delete a Station Speed Dial bin perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Speed Dial bin number to be erased 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button 5 The stored Speed Dial number should be erased from the speed bin To display and enter a Speed Dial bin by scrolling perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Speed Dial bin number 4 Press the UP or DOWN keys to display the next previous Speed dial number 20 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Oper
256. nd accessing the unanswered calls etc Attendants can change simple settings of the whole System or Intercom Tenancy groups LCD date time format etc There are 2 types of Attendants in the ARIA SOHO System Main Attendant Up to 5 Stations can be defined as Main Attendants that control the whole System the first Main Attendant is called the System Attendant and cannot be removed from the System but can be changed Intercom Tenancy Group Attendant Each Intercom Tenancy group refer to Ref A can have its own Attendant that controls and effects only the Stations belonging to the group Figure 2 13 describes the arrangement of Attendants within the System ARIA SOHO System STA 101 Default STA a STA b STA c STA d Main Attendant 2 Main Attendant 3 Main Attendant 4 Main Attendant 5 Main Attendant Assignment intercom tenancy group intercom tenancy group attendant FIGURE 2 13 ATTENDANT SERVICE Reference A Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 14 114 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 13 1 Assign Attendant Description By default the first Station i e Station 100 is assigned as the System Attendant and other Attendants are not automatically assigned unless programmed PGM 164 Intercom Tenancy group Attendants can be assigned using Admin Programming PGM 120 FLEX1 Reference A Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 14 A
257. ndant 01 12 NET_PCATD 11 CTI 01 12 NET_CTI 12 Remote Diagnostic 01 12 NET_REMOTE 01 COM1 02 Not Supported 03 COM2 MODU 04 TELNET 1 05 TELNET 2 06 TELNET 3 07 Not Supported 08 NET_PCADM 09 NET_PCATD 10 NET_CTI 11 NET_REMOTE 3 5 6 Pick up Group Attribute If the Hunt Group type selected is Pick up Group the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 191 3 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Auto Pickup If this value is set to ON and there is ringing at a Hunt member another Hunt member can pick up the call automatically by pressing the MON button or going off hook FLEX1 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON All Ring If this value is set to ON and a Hunt Group member receives an intercom call then all Hunt Group member Stations will ring NOTE Auto Pick up Admin program FLEX1 must be set to ON for this to work FLEX2 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 68 3 6 SMDR Local Code PGM 204 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 204 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 220 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS SMDR Local Code Table Designates
258. ne 1 545 545 6 41 6 545 45 545 6 All Call Page INT amp EXT 549 549 00 6 00 549 49 549 7 SMDR Account Code Enter 550 550 550 550 50 550 50 550 SLT 8 Flash Command to CO Line 551 551 551 551 51 551 51 551 SLT 9 Last Number Redial 552 552 552 552 52 552 52 552 SLT 10 DND Toggle ON OFF 553 553 553 553 53 553 53 553 SLT 11 Call Forward 554 554 554 554 54 554 54 554 SLT 12 Speed dial Programming 555 555 555 40 55 555 55 555 SLT 13 Message Wait Callback Enable 556 556 556 566 56 556 56 556 SLT 14 Message Wait Callback Return 557 557 557 567 57 557 57 557 SLT 15 Speed dial Access 558 558 558 7 58 558 58 558 SLT 16 Cancel DND FWD Pre MSG 559 559 559 559 59 559 59 559 SLT 17 SLT Hold 560 560 560 560 690 560 30 560 SLT 18 Reserved 19 Reserved 20 Programming Mode Enter Code 563 563 563 563 693 3 33 3 SLT 106 21 ACD Reroute 564 564 564 564 694 4 34 4 1 Alarm Reset 565 565 565 565 695 565 35 565 107 2 Group Call Pickup 566 566 1 566 36 566 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 9 PGM FLEX FIELD NUMBER SET 1 NUMBER SET 2 NUMBER SET 3 NUMBER SET 4 NUMBER SET 5 NUMBER SET 6 NUMBER SET 7 NUMBER SET
259. ng SLIB Gain Control 414 Far SLIB Gain Control 415 Short ACO Gain Control 416 Long ACO Gain Control 420 System Tone Frequency 421 Differential ring Frequency 422 Distinct CO ring Frequency 423 ACNR Tone Cadence 425 Singular Table Korea Only NATION SPECIFIC 450 Initialization INITIALIZATION DB INIT 451 Print Port Database PRINT DATABASE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 7 Default Values LOCATION PROGRAM PGM FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK 1 Nation Code 82 Max 4 Digits 100 2 Customer Site Name Max 24 Digits BOARD SLOT ASSIGNMENT PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 101 Slot Assignment Refer to Board Code Table Refer to NOTE NOTE If the DIP switch of the manual board detection DIP Switch 4 9is ON the System will detect the installed board type automatically If the DIP Switch 4 is OFF the board type code must be entered at each slot After manual Rack Slot assignment the User should reset the system manually BOARD TYPE CODE TABLE STATION CODE CO LINE CODE STATION amp CO LINE CODE ETC CODE DPU SLIB16 SLIB8 Hybrid 11 13 14 17 LCOB3 33 VMIU AAFU 64 65 NOTE Slot 9 can not be changed LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT PGM FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK 1 COL Board 2 STA Board Refer to NOTE 103 3 VMIB Board Not Assigned NOTE If the DIP Switch of the manual board detection DIP Sw
260. ng calls will be received at the next station by ring assignment refer to Ref B The Attendant can override a Station in DND mode by Camp On or Intrusion refer to Ref A The Attendant may cancel DND for one or all Stations Reference A Attendant Intrusion Override 2 13 4 2 13 5 B Ring Assignment 2 1 1 2 4 9 One Time Do Not Disturb DND Description One Time DND allows a Station User to turn off muted ringing that occurs when off hook handset or MON while on another call The Station User while off hook can depress the DND button and block muted ringing When the Station returns to an idle state the DND button will be extinguished and DND is cancelled Operation To activate One Time DND from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 While in an off hook state or connecting a CO Line or intercom call press the DND FOR button 2 The Station will be in DND mode the DND FOR button LED should be illuminated 3 When the Station returns to an idle state DND will be released at the Station the DND FOR button will be extinguished Admin Programming Do Not Disturb DND PGM 111 FLEX3 2 4 10 Flash Description The Flash type and duration of each CO Line is assigned by the System There are two types of Flash CO Flash Provides Station Users with the ability to terminate an outside call or transfer a call without hanging up A FLASH button is located on each DKTU Flash on ICM Call
261. nge 1 4 HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 Station 2 Hunt 3 VMIB 00 70 00 Not Assigned 4 System Speed 2000 2499 Overflow Timer If the timer expires after a call is received in the group the call will be routed to the Overflow Destination FLEX8 Seconds Range 000 600 HOLD SAVE Wrap up Timer Designates the amount of time a call will be held in a busy state following expiration of the timer FLEX9 Seconds Range 000 600 HOLD SAVE No Answer Timer In Circular Terminal Hunt Groups if the incoming call is not answered during the allowed time the call will be routed to the next idle Station in the Group FLEX10 Seconds Range 002 999 HOLD SAVE Pilot Hunt If this value is set to ON calls to each Hunt Group member will be processed as a call to the Hunt Group A Circular Terminal Hunt Group can be assigned with a pilot number so that only calls to the pilot number so that only calls to the pilot number will be treated as calls to the Hunt Group FLEX11 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Alt If No Member If a member is not on duty intercom calls will be dropped and CO incoming calls will be routed to the designated overflow destination or will ring at the assigned Station if the overflow destination is not assigned FLEX12 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 20
262. nnot receive alarm signals Alarm reset can be programmed on a flexible button Admin Programming Alarm Enable PGM 163 FLEX1 Alarm Contact Type PGM 163 FLEX2 Alarm Mode PGM 163 FLEX3 Alarm Signal Mode PGM 163 FLEX4 Station Alarm Attribute PGM 113 FLEX10 2 4 3 Automatic Privacy Description Automatic Privacy allows a Station User to suspend automatic privacy for an existing CO Line conversation without invitation By default all conversations that take place on CO Lines the Intercom and Conferences are protected by Automatic Privacy NOTE Admin Programming PGM 161 FLEX5 is required to enable or disable this feature Operation If Automatic Privacy is enabled when pressing a busy CO Line button a busy tone will be heard If Automatic Privacy is disabled when pressing a buy CO Line button the Station is connected to the conversation in progress Condition When Automatic Privacy is disabled privacy is still activated for Intercom and Conference calls A Station can only override a privacy disabled Station The Station will present an intrusion tone when another Station accesses the line Admin Programming Auto Privacy PGM 161 FLEX5 Privacy Warning Tone PGM 161 FLEX6 Override Privilege PGM 113 FLEX4 43 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 4 Background Music BGM Description A User can listen
263. not used Channel 01 Internal music Channel 02 External music Channel 03 Reserved Channel 04 8 SLT MOH refer to Ref B 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Reference A Background Music BGM 2 4 4 B Music on Hold MOH 2 4 16 Admin Programming Intercom Box Music Channel PGM 171 2 13 11 Station Feature Cancel Description Attendants can cancel features of other Stations such as DND Call forward and Pre Selected Messages refer to Ref A B or C Operation To disable an active feature on another Station from the attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 071 3 Dial the desired Station range 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Reference A One Time Do Not Disturb DND 2 4 9 B Call Forward 2 3 1 C Pre Selected Message 2 4 1 2 122 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 13 12 DSS DLS Consoles Description Attendants and other DKTU s may be equipped with DSS DLS consoles which provide additional buttons for more convenient operation The consoles are arranged as flexible mapped units The DSS DLS consoles are assigned with programming as one of the 3 maps All buttons of any map are programmable The DSS DLS consoles each require a separate line connection to the KSU and take up a Station number Condition There is no limit to the number of DSS DLS consoles in a system
264. ntrusion code and immediately be connected to the Station Operation To activate Emergency Intrusion perform the following Steps 1 When the Supervisor receives the busy signal when attempting a call to another Station press the Emergency Intrusion code ex 2 The Supervisor should immediately be connected to the Station and the existing call at the Station will be disconnected Condition An Emergency Intrusion call is only available when the Supervisor station is programmed for Emergency Intrusion The existing call at the Station will be disconnected following a short warning tone when the Supervisor uses the Emergency Intrusion Emergency Intrusion cannot be used if a Station is in DND mode Emergency Intrusion cannot be used when calling an Attendant Station Emergency Intrusion cannot be used when calling a Net DSS An Emergency supervisor can only be connected to the Master Station in the case of a linked pair When an Emergency Supervisor calls an Executive Station the call will be connected to the Executive Attendant Station Admin Programming Emergency Intrusion Code PGM 109 FLEX7 Emergency Supervisor PGM 112 FLEX24 2 4 35 Forced Trunk Disconnect Description The Forced Trunk Disconnect feature allows an authorized User Emergency Supervisor to disconnect an active outside call at another Station and then initiate a new outgoing call on the released line NOTE This feature is to
265. o Answer when the initial Destination returns an error Tone Attendant Hunt 7 Reroute No Answer Destination FLEX1 FLEX3 FLEX1 Determines if call is rerouted to another No Answer Destination on No Answer when the initial Destination does not answer Tone Attendant Hunt 1 First Contact 1 3 168 2 Second Contact 1 3 1 LBC Station Number 2 RESERVED 3 Extension 1 1 LCD Time Display Mode 12H 24H 12H 12H Ordinary Time 24H Military Time 2 LCD Date Display Mode MMDDYY DDMMYY DDMMYY MMDDYY Month Day Year DDMMYY Day Month Year 169 3 LCD Language Display Mode 00 15 12 Korean Modem Associated Device Only available if MODU is installed on the MPB 1 Station Number 10 57 Station 57 Designated the Modem associated Station 170 2 CO Number 01 08 Modem associated with CO Line can not be used for outgoing CO calls 1 BGM Type 0 8 01 Determines source for BGM 2 MOH Type 0 9 01 Determines MOH used for System Exclusive Transfer Conference Hold states 3 ICM Box Music Channel 0 8 01 4 Assign MOH via SLT FLEX1 FLEX5 Determines Station use for setting MOH 5 Dial Tone Source 0 5 0 Not Assigned Determines the use of External Dial Tone set by SLT 171 6 ICM Ring Back Tone 0 5 0 Not Assigned Determines use of External IC Ring Back Tone set by SLT ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 20 P
266. o Dial Tone Detect Admin 160 FLEX6 B Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Speed Dial Program Code Admin 106 FLEX15 C Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Speed Dial Access Code Admin 106 FLEX18 Admin Programming Speed Dial Access PGM 112 FLEX9 CO Dial Tone Detect PGM 160 FLEX6 21 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 2 8 5 System Speed Dialing Description System Speed dial bins are programmed by the System Attendant Figure 2 2 8 5 These numbers are available for easy access by all Stations allowed in the System The maximum System Speed Dial capacity is 500 in the ARIA SOHO FIGURE 2 2 8 5 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL SYSTEM SPEED DIAL SPEED DIAL RANGE DESCRIPTION 2000 2199 Unrestricted 2200 2499 Restricted by Station COS 22 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 SYSTEM COS COS 1 NO RESTRICTION TO DIAL COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B COS 4 Monitored by Exception Table A amp B COS 5 Long distance calls not allowed more than 7 digits can be dialed COS 6 Long distance calls not allowed max 7 digits can be dialed COS 7 Only intercom paging and emergency calls are allowed no dialing allowed on CO Lines Operation To store a number in a System Speed Dial
267. o an idle state Admin Programming In Room Indication PGM 183 FLEX1 In Room Indication Member PGM 183 FLEX2 2 4 33 Chime Bell Description If the Chime Bell is activated at a Station the chime bell will ring at the station when the Chime Bell button is pressed Operation To program a flexible button as the Chime Bell button perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Dial the code TRANS PGM 9 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To activate Chime Bell at a Station perform the following 1 Press the Chime Bell flexible button at the Station where the Chime Bell should ring Condition Chime Bell will stop ringing when the Chime Bell timer expires Chime Bell ringing cannot be answered If the Chime Bell Station is busy or off hook the Station will receive a muted ring instead Up to 14 Chime Bell pairs can be assigned Chime Bell master and slave station should be programmed using the key set Admin Programming Chime Bell Station Pair PGM 184 FLEX1 Chime Bell Relay PGM 184 FLEX2 Chime Bell Timer PGM 184 FLEX3 Chime Bell Frequency PGM 184 FLEX4 71 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 34 Emergency Intrusion If the Supervisor Station received the busy signal on a call to another station the Supervisor can dial the Emergency I
268. old from a SLT depending on Hold Preference perform the following Steps 1 While on a call hook flash and dial 560 refer to Ref B 34 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To access a CO Line on Exclusive System Hold from the DKTU where the call was placed on hold perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the CO button OR 3 Dial 8 and the CO Line number refer to Ref C To access a CO Line on Exclusive System Hold from the SLT where the call was placed on hold perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 8 refer to Ref D Condition The CO Line placed on Exclusive Hold will flash at the Station and the LED of CO Line will light at other Stations The CO Line placed on System Hold will flash at all Stations When Exclusive Hold is set at a Station the Exclusive Hold Recall timer will be initiated after the timer expires the original Station will receive a recall ring for the duration for the I Hold Recall timer When a System Hold is set at a Station the System Hold Recall timer will be initiated after the timer expires the original Station will receive a recall for the duration of the I Hold Recall timer When the I Hold Recall timer expires the Attendant will receive a recall ring for the duration of the Attendant Recall timer if the call remains unanswered the call will be disconnected If a call is p
269. omatically cancelled refer to Ref A Users can leave a message at a DKTU or SLT when leaving a message at the SLT a DND warning tone will be heard when the handset is lifted as a reminder for the message waiting When a Pre Selected message is selected in a DKTU the DND FOR button will flash as applicable Reference A Call Forward 2 3 1 Admin Programming Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Numbering Plan PGM 106 2 4 2 Alarm Description The system can be programmed to recognize the status of an external contact from a relay open or closed When activated the System will signal programmed Stations with a single tone repeated per 1 min interval or a continuous tone This capability is commonly employed to provide remote alarm signals When used as an alarm the assigned Stations receive the programmed signal To stop the signal the alarm should be deactivated reset from a Station assigned to receive the alarm signal Operation When detecting the alarm signal while the line is in an idle state perform the following 1 Dial 565 a confirmation tone should be heard 2 The alarm signal will be terminated at all assigned Stations 42 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition An external contact should be connected to the alarm input The alarm contacts should be dry no voltage current source connected SLT phones ca
270. on OR 2 Lift the handset OR 3 Press the MUTE button while a CO Line is accessed to cancel ACNR 17 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition A DKTU that doesn t have a REDIAL button should be programmed with a REDIAL flexible button to use ACNR When a predefined CO Line is busy in ACNR mode an available CO Line in the same group will be secured Admin Programming ACNR Pause Timer PGM 180 FLEX10 ACNR Delay Timer PGM 180 FLEX8 ACNR Tone Detect Timer PGM180 FLEX13 Analog CO Line only ACNR No Answer Timer PGM 180 FLEX9 ACNR Retry Counter PGM 180 FLEX11 ACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 2 2 8 2 Last Number Redialing Description The last dialed number on a CO Line can be stored up to 32 digits in the Station s Last Number Redial buffer The User may select to redial the last number dialed on the System On the System each DKTU with an LCD panel has 10 individual last dialed number directory locations Operation To use Last Number Redial on a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the REDIAL button OR 3 Press the SPEED button and press the key 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept To use one of the recently dialed numbers in the Last Number Directory by scrolling at a DKTU with an LCD panel perform the following Steps 1 When the l
271. on Type Determines the port to be used for the printer when the SMDR interface service is set FLEX20 1 LAN HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 SIO 1 LAN ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 50 3 3 19 System Time Date Setting PGM 178 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 178 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 178 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS System Time Sets the System time Hour Min in sequence ex for 11 30 enter 1130 FLEX1 VALUE 4 digits HOLD SAVE System Date Sets the System date Month Day Year in sequence ex for 27 Januar 2004 enter 270104 FLEX2 VALUE MMDDYY HOLD SAVE 3 3 20 Linked Station Pairs PGM 179 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 179 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 179 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS To View Linked Station Pairs FLEX1 To Register Linked Station Pairs FLEX2 Master Station Number Slave Station Number HOLD SAVE Linked Station Pairs Linked Station pairs can be viewed FLEX1 and registered FLEX2 If linked pairs are assigned to a wired DKT or SLT and wireless station WHTU the wired station should be assigned as the Master Station NOTE when there are too many stations to see
272. on is programmed for Authorization Code use the User must enter the Authorization Code before accessing a CO Line An Authorization Code can be used for SMDR DISA Account Code NOTE Personal Authorization Codes should be kept secure by the System Attendant and individual Station User to avoid unapproved phone calls being made An Authorization Code is assigned as 3 11 digits as applicable each Station has a different Authorization Code Operation To access a CO Line using an Authorization Code perform the following Steps 1 When attempting CO Line access a DND warning tone will be heard 2 Enter the Authorization Code and press the key if authorization code is longer than 5 digits the key is not needed 3 If valid the CO Line will be connected if not valid an error tone will be presented To register an Authorization Code on a Station perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 31 Authorization Code feature 3 Enter the desired Authorization Code and press the key if Authorization Code is longer than 5 digits the key is not needed 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes To change the Authorization Code at a Station perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 32 and enter the current Authorization Code 3 Enter the new Authorization Code 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept the change Condition Up to 200 Author
273. one Timer When lifting the handset or pressing the MON button the system will be activated as a predefined button is pressed It is possible to activate Hot Warm Line at a SLT Station Admin Programming Warm Line Timer PGM 182 FLEX8 Warm Line PGM 113 FLEX7 Idle Line Selection PGM 122 13 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 2 7 Least Call Routing Description LCR is a System programmable feature that automatically selects the least expensive available route when an outgoing CO call is made This programming eliminates the necessity for the User to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier There are three ways to activate LCR Internal LCR If dialed digits are matched with an internal LCR code the System will secure a CO Line from the programmed CO Group and send the modified digits according to LCR programming Loop LCR When dialing the first accessible CO Group Code 9 or 0 or pressing the LOOP button if the digits match with a COL LCR code the System will secure a CO Line from the programmed CO Group and send the modified digits according to LCR programming Direct CO LCR After dialing a CO Line or CO Group code 9 or 0 depending on the nation you are calling from or pressing a CO Line or CO Group button LCR can be activated If the dialed digits are matched with a COL LCR code the System will secure a CO Line from
274. orm the following 1 Press the DND FOR button Condition The Secretary Station can pass a call to the Executive Station when in DND mode refer to Ref A using the Camp On Feature refer to Ref B One Executive Station can have multiple Secretaries with the maximum amount of Pairs conversely one Secretary can have multiple Executives with the allowable maximum amount of Pairs When an Executive is in DND mode the Secretary can transfer a CO Line call or Camp On refer to Ref C It is possible to make a chain to assign Executive Secretary Pairs a Secretary may be an Executive in another Executive Secretary Pair If an Executive and the Secretary are both busy and there is an Secondary Secretary to the original Secretary the call will be forwarded to the Secondary location can not be a loop chain If an Executive has multiple Secretaries and the first Secretary is busy the call will be forwarded to the next successive Secretary in the list If an Executive has multiple Secretaries and is busy a Secretary can forward a call to another Secretary but a Secretary can not forward to an Executive 95 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 If an Executive forwards a call to a non secretary Station the call to the Executive Station will be routed to the assigned Station refer to Ref D When both the Executive and Secretary in a Pair are busy Camp On Transferred ca
275. orward perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 8 4 Secure a CO Line if required 5 Dial the desired phone number and then press the HOLD SAVE button 6 Go on hook by replacing the handset 28 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To activate no answer Off Net Call Forward perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 9 4 Secure a CO Line if required 5 Dial the desired phone number and press the HOLD SAVE button 6 Go on hook by replacing the handset 2 3 1 7 Call Forward Incoming CO Off Net Attendant Only Description The System Attendant can direct the System to re route forward incoming CO Line calls to a directory number telephone number outside the System When a call is received the System will access an outgoing CO Line and dial the number assigned by the Attendant NOTE the System will automatically disconnect the call after the Unsupervised Conference timer has expired FIELD ACCESS CODE CO Group Access 801 808 Individual CO Access 88XX Retrieve Held CO Line 8 Operation To activate incoming CO Line Off Net Call Forward at the Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON
276. p the Allow Deny tables If the tables have no entries no restriction is applied If entries are made in only the Allow table then only those numbers are allowed If entries are made only in the Deny table then only those numbers are denied If there are entries in both tables the allow table is searched at first and if the number is found it is allowed If not found the deny table is searched and if the number is found it is denied If it is not found in either table it is allowed In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 224 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 224 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Allow Table A Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS2 and COS4 Station match with the allowed toll pass digits NOTE Allow Table A is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS2 or 4 FLEX1 VALUE refer to Allow Table Range 01 30 Allow Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Deny Table A Used to check whether the digits dialed by a COS2 and COS4 Station match with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Deny Table A is only used when the COS of the dialed Station is COS2 or 4 FLEX2 VALUE refer to Deny Table Range 01 30 Deny Number Max 14 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June
277. passed Admin Programming Preset Call forward PGM 121 Preset Call forward Timer PGM 181 FLEX12 31 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 3 2 Call Transfer Description An intercom call or CO Call can be transferred to another Station or CO Line during a conversation There are 2 kinds of call transfer Screened and Unscreened Transfer as detailed in the following Table FEATURE METHOD Screened Transfer Transfer is completed after announcing the calling party Unscreened Transfer Transfer is completed without an announcement after dialing the destination Station and hearing the ringing tone the transferring party replaces the handset to connect the calling party to the destination Station 2 3 2 1 Call Transfer to CO Line Description A Station User may transfer a connected call to a new CO call If an external ISDN party does not answer the transferred call within the designated Transfer Hold Recall timer the transferring Station will receive a recall ring If the call remains unanswered the Attendant will receive a recall ring for the duration of the Attendant Recall timer After that the CO Line will be disconnected and returned to an idle state Operation To conduct an Unscreened CO Line transfer perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 The intercom dial tone should be heard and the call will be placed on hold 3 Sec
278. pe No Range 01 11 02 Group Number HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 F01 F24 2 F25 F48 BUTTON TYPE FOR FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT NO TYPE RANGE REMARK 1 User Key User can program by button programming procedure empty 2 CO xx Button 01 12 CO Line 3 CO Grp xx 01 08 CO Line Group 4 LOOP 5 STAxxxx 100 151 Station No 6 STA PGM Button 11 99 7 STA SPDxx 00 99 Station Speed Bin 8 SYS SPDxxxx 2000 2499 System Speed Bin 9 FLEX NUM Num Plan Code Numbering Plan Code of ADMIN 106 107 11 Hunt Group Button 620 629 Hunt Group No INITIAL BUTTON CONFIGURATION FLEX 12 BUTTON DIGITAL 24 BUTTON DIGITAL 1 CO1 CO1 2 CO2 CO2 3 CO3 CO3 4 CO4 CO4 5 CO5 CO5 6 CO6 CO6 7 CO7 CO7 8 CO8 CO8 9 LOOP LOOP 10 24 Not Assigned ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 16 3 1 7 Station COS PGM 116 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 116 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number or Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM116 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Station COS Each Station is assigned a Class of Service COS that determines the Station toll restriction for day and night operation refer to Table On a particular call the CO COS is combined with Stat
279. phone number 6 Press HOLD button To activate speed dial with dialing security SPEED button Speed dial bin number which was programmed with dialing security Condition Dialed phone numbers with Dialing Security are included in SMDR information refer to Ref B This feature applied to transferred or recalled CO calls This feature applies to redial calls refer to Ref C Reference A Speed Dialing 2 2 8 B SMDR 2 12 C Redial 2 2 8 2 4 8 Do Not Disturb DND Description Placing a Station in Do Not Disturb DND mode blocks incoming outside line ringing intercom calls transfers and paging announcements while in DND the Station will not receive calls on CO lines The Attendant can override a Station in DND refer to Ref A Stations in DND can continue to make normal outgoing calls Station Users can individually place their Station in DND PGM 114 By default DND is available at all Stations Operation To activate DND from a DKTU perform the following 1 Press the DND FOR button To cancel DND from a DKTU perform the following 1 Press the DND FOR button Condition Pressing the DND FOR button during call forward or a pre selected message will not activate DND call forward or the pre selected message will be released 47 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 When a Station assigned to preset call forward is in DND mode incomi
280. r 000 255 3 Digits 015 Sec Determines time delay before routing No Answer calls 2 DID DISA No Answer Timer 00 99 2 Digits 00 Sec Determines time delay before routing DID DISA No Answer calls 3 VMIB User Record Timer 010 255 3 Digits 020 Sec Determines time allowed to record VMIB messages 4 VMIB Valid User Message Timer 0 9 1 Digit 4 Sec Determines minimum time to record VMIB message 0 no messages 5 Door Open Timer 05 99 2 Digits 20 100ms Determines time delay for executing the Open Door command 6 ICM Box Timer 00 60 2 digits 10 100ms Determines time at ICM box when User presses the CALL button 7 ICM Dial Tone Timer 01 20 2 Digits 10 Sec Determines time delay before returning an error tone when station is Off Hook 8 Inter Digital Timer 01 20 2 Digits 05 Sec Determines time delay allowed between dialed digits before returning an error tone 9 MSG Wait Reminder Tone Timer 00 60 2 Digits 00 Min Determines time delay between repeated Message Wait reminder tones 10 Paging Timeout Timer 000 255 3 Digits 000 Sec Determines time allowed for Paging 11 Pause Timer 1 9 1 Digit 3 Sec Determines time delay between entering a Speed Dial or LNR and when the System sends the digits to the outgoing CO Line 12 Preset Call Forward Timer 00 99 2 Digits 10 Sec Determines time delay before forwarding calls to designated Station Preset Cal
281. r that will receive the call To use Call Forward busy on a pre assigned flexible button 1 Press the assigned flexible button 2 The LED of DND FOR button will flash and the function assigned to the flexible button will be activated To activate Call Forward to VMIB perform the following 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 1 4 4 Dial the VMIB selection code number to receive the calls 5 Go on hook by replacing the handset 2 3 1 3 Call Forward No Answer Description When the Station User does not answer within a predetermined amount of time the call can be forwarded to an alternate location 26 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Operation To activate Call Forward when there is no answer perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 3 4 Dial Station or Group or VMIB number to receive the call To use Call Forward no answer on a pre assigned flexible button 1 Press the assigned flexible button 2 The LED of DND FOR button will flash and the function assigned to the flexible button will be activated Admin Programming Call Forward Answer Timer PGM 181 FLEX1 2 3 1 4 Call Forward Busy No Answer Description A User can direct the System to re ro
282. r unit pulse FLEX11 VALUE Range 0 5 HOLD SAVE SMDR Start Timer If this value is set to a non zero value only an outgoing CO call with a higher timer value will activate SMDR FLEX12 Timer Range 000 250 HOLD SAVE SMDR Hidden Digit If this value is set to RIGHT SMDR digit hiding is executed in the right to left direction ex dialed number 1234567890 Would be shown as 12345 If this value is set to LEFT the value would be shown as 67890 FLEX13 0 LEFT HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 LEFT 1 RIGHT SMDR Long Distance Codes A long distance call is defined as a call that satisfies the condition of the Admin program 177 FLEX4 or FLEX14 FLEX14 FLEX1 Range FLEX1 FLEX5 1 up to 2 digits Range 0 99 HOLD SAVE VALUES Default 0 Maximum of 5 SMDR long distance codes FLEX1 FLEX5 MSN Print on SMDR If this value is set to ON the MSN number is printed instead of the Station number when an outgoing MSN call is made FLEX15 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Print Caller Number If this value is set to ON the caller number is printed when receiving an incoming SMDR call FLEX16 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON SMDR Interface Service If this value is set to ON SMDR format for CIS INDIA KOREA is available FLEX19 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON I SMDR Connecti
283. re on duty or all members are busy incoming CO calls will be routed to an alternate destination FLEX13 Destination Type refer to VALUES Station or Hunt Group Number HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 Station 2 Hunt ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 63 PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Supervisor Timer If no members are on duty or all members are busy incoming CO calls will be queued The Hunt Group Supervisor will be able to see the queued incoming call count until the Max Queue Count is attained FLEX14 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE Supervisor Call Count If the number of queued calls is more than the Supervisor Call Count the supervisor timer will be started FLEX15 Seconds Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE ACD Queued Call If this value is set to ON the count of queued calls can be displayed on the Supervisor Station LCD FLEX16 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Max Queue Count The maximum amount of calls that can be queued If the total queue count is achieved the next call into the queuing will be disconnected FLEX17 Seconds Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE Supervisor Used to set the Supervisor Station number FLEX18 Station Number Range 100 125 HOLD SAVE UCD Hunt Station Priority Used to set UCD Group member priority The value 0 is highest priority with 9 the lowest If a Station
284. riction is on an Allow Only basis If there are entries in both the Allow and Deny tables the Allow table is searched if the dialed number matches an entry in the Allow table the call is allowed If a match is not found the Deny Table is searched and if a match is found in the Deny table the number is restricted Otherwise the number is allowed 78 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 General Conditions If an incoming Co Call Toll Check is set the COS rule is applied when the Station dials digits after answering incoming CO calls Admin Programming Station COS PGM 116 CO Line COS PGM 141 FLEX2 CO to CO COS PGM 166 Toll Exception Table PGM 224 Canned Toll Tables PGM 225 Incoming Toll Check PGM 161 FLEX16 2 5 5 System Speed Zone Description Up to 10 Speed number zones can be defined Speed bins and Stations can be allocated to these zones Toll Checks based on COS can be applied to zones refer to Ref A Only Stations allocated to zones can access these bins Speed bins not allocated to zones can be accessed by all Stations and no Toll Checks are applied Reference A COS 2 5 4 Admin Programming Speed Dial Access PGM 112 FLEX 9 System Speed Zone PGM 232 CO Dial Tone Detect PGM 160 FLEX 6 2 5 6 Walking COS Description This feature allows temporary override of the Toll Restriction and allows toll calls from pr
285. rint Out 112 2 13 Attendant Service 114 2 13 1 Assign Attendant 115 2 13 2 Attendant Call and Queuing 115 II ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 13 3 Attendant Forward 116 2 13 4 Attendant Intrusion 117 2 13 5 Attendant Override 118 2 13 6 Attendant Recall 119 2 13 7 Change LCD Date Time Display 119 2 13 8 Day Night Service 120 2 13 9 Disable Outgoing Access
286. rivilege FLEX5 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ADMIN 113 FLEX4 Privacy Warning Tone If this value is set to ON a privacy warning tone will be heard when a call is overridden FLEX6 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Single Ring for CO Call If this value is set to YES the ICM ring cadence and the CO ring cadence will be reversed FLEX7 1 YES HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 NO 1 YES Automatic Call Distribution ACD Print Enable If this value is set to ON ACD printing is available FLEX9 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ACD Print Timer ACD database can be printed per the desired time interval 10 sec or 1 hr base FLEX10 002 3 digits Range 001 225 HOLD SAVE VALUES ADMIN 161 FLEX14 ACD Clear Database After Print If this value is set to ON the ACD database is re initialized after printing FLEX11 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON VMIB Prompt Gain Used to designate the VMIB Announcement prompt gain FLEX12 02 2 digits Range 00 31 HOLD SAVE CLI Information at VM Simplified Message Desk Interface SMDI If this value is set to ON CLI is added when Voice Mail information is printed through RS232 port by SMDI FLEX13 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ACD Print Timer Unit This value determines the unit of ACD Print Timer FLEX14 1 HOUR HOLD SA
287. rmines if CO Line is secured according to Last Choice or using Round Robin method 4 DISA Retry Counter 0 9 3 DISA can continue to try and connect a call during the counter when initial call is not connected 5 ICM Continuous Dial Tone CONTINU OUS DISCONTI NUOUS CONTINU OUS Determines if ICM dial tone is Continuous or Discontinuous 6 CO Dial Tone Detect ON OFF OFF Determines if System will use CPT to detect dial tone instead of pulse timer 7 External Night Ring ON OFF OFF Determines if UNA service is activated on incoming calls 8 Hold Preference SYSTEM EXECUTIV E SYSTEM Determines if System or Exclusive Hold is preferred for use 9 Multi Line Conference ON OFF ON Determines if Multi Line Conference is available 10 Print LCR Conversion Digit ON OFF OFF Determines if LCR digits are shown in addition to original dialed digits on LCD and SMDR data 11 Conference Warning Tone ON OFF ON Determines if warning tone is used when a new party enters a conference 12 Off Net Prompt Usage ON OFF ON Determines if Off Net VMIB will be heard on Off Net Call Forward CO to CO Transfer 13 Off Net DTMF Tone ON OFF ON Determines if dialing DTMF tone will be heard to outside caller on Off Net Call Forward CO to CO Transfer 14 CO Voice Path Connect IMM DGT DGT Determines if voice path is connected immediately or after dialing digits 160 15 Transfer Tone RBT MOH MOH D
288. rogram mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 142 3 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 142 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS CO Line Name Display If this value is set to ON and the CO Line Name is assigned the Name is displayed on the Station LCD when the Station receives an incoming CO call through the CO Line FLEX1 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON CO Line Name Assign Designates the name of the CO Line FLEX2 CO LINE NAME Max 12 characters refer to Key set Map HOLD SAVE VALUES ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 25 KEYSET MAP 13 Q 11 Z 12 1 10 A 21 B 22 C 23 2 20 D 31 E 32 F 33 3 30 G 41 H 42 I 43 4 40 J 51 K 52 L 53 5 50 M 61 N 62 O 63 6 60 P 71 Q 72 R 73 S 74 7 70 T 81 U 82 V 83 8 80 W 91 X 92 Y 93 Z 9 9 90 1 Blank 2 3 0 00 PGM 142 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Metering Unit Designates the unit used to detect pulses from the CO Line There are 7 metering signal types refer to VALUES FLEX3 METERING SIGNAL TYPE HOLD SAVE VALUES 00 None 01 50 Hz not available in ARIA SOHO
289. ropped by pressing the FLASH button or Hook Flashing FLEX15 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Loop LCR Account Code If this value is set to ON the Station User must enter an Account Code to use Loop LCR FLEX16 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON VMIB Message Type FIFO LIFO plays the first recorded VMIB message or the latest message respectively FLEX17 1 FIFO HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 LIFO 1 FIFO Off Net Call Forward If this value is set to ON off net call forward can be used FLEX18 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Forced Hands Free If this value is set to ON the Station can force the called party Station to use the hands free mode when it is ringing FLEX19 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON CID SLT CAS Gain not available in ARIA SOHO This feature selects CID SLT CAS Gain value FLEX20 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 20 CID SLT FSK Gain not available in ARIA SOHO This program sets FSK gain for CID SLT FLEX21 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 20 Caller Voice Over If this value is set to ON the Station can perform a Voice Over at a busy Station FLEX22 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 9 3 1 3 Station Attributes II PGM 112 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press t
290. roup Access code or press a CO or CO Group button 2 It is a COL LCR code if the code if the code is programmed with COL or BOTH in the Leading Digit Table Ex 1 Add Prefix Digit The long distance call access code starts with 0 i e 01 031 051 If a cheaper carrier exists the User can access it with the carrier access code 082 and the long distance access code without 0 ARIA SOHO System Administrator wants to use this cheaper carrier for all long distance calls i e dial 0314502628 082314504628 ADMIN 220 ADMIN 221 LDT ADMIN 222 DMT LCR Mode M01 M02 M11 M12 Loop LCR enabled Bin 000 LCR Type COL LCR Code 0 DMT 00 00 00 Bin 00 Remove Position 01 Remove Number 01 Add Position 01 Add Digit 082 Ex 2 Select CO Group The ARIA SOHO System is connected with two carriers one carrier is carrier A the other carrier is carrier B Carrier B is used for International calls and Carrier A is used for all other calls The International call access code is 001 The ARIA SOHO System Administrator wants to program Carrier B to be used for only International calls ADMIN 141 ADMIN 117 ADMIN 161 3 Set CO Lines from the Carrier A to Co Group 1 Set CO Lines from the Carrier B to CO Group 2 Enable access CO Group 01 02 Override 1st CO Group OFF ADMIN 220 ADMIN 221 LDT ADMIN 222 DMT LCR Mode M01 M02 M11 M12 Loop LCR enabled Bin 000 LCR Type COL LCR Code 001 DMT 00 00
291. rsal Night Answer PGM 141 FLEX8 External Night Ring PGM 160 FLEX7 8 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 2 Outgoing Call Access 2 2 1 Basic Access Description Each Station is allowed or denied access on particular CO Lines or CO Groups Station Users may use Flexible buttons which are assigned as a CO or CO Group button including the POOL and LOOP buttons According to the Numbering Plan Station Users can access individual CO Lines by dialing CO Access codes FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPERATION METHOD ACCESS Idle Line Access 88 CO Line Number Automatically selects an idle CO Line from the assigned CO Groups Dial the idle Line Access Number 9 or press a CO Line button 8801 8816 CO Group Access 8 CO Group Number Selects an idle CO Line from the corresponding CO Group Dial the CO Group Access number and a CO Group number or press a CO Group button 801 808 A User can dial 9 refer to Ref A to access the first idle line in the CO Group refer to Ref D A User can dial 8801 refer to Ref B to access CO Line 01 if it is idle A User can dial 801 refer to Ref C to access the first idle CO Line in CO Group 1 Operation To access a CO Line from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the desired CO Line POOL or LOOP button OR 3 Dial the indivi
292. rt Timer 0 250 0 Determines value for measuring outgoing call SMDR 13 SMDR Hidden Digit RIGHT LE FT RIGHT RIGHT 12345 LEFT 67890 14 SMDR Long Distance Codes FLEX FLEX1 FLEX5 0 Max 5 SMDR Long Distance Admin 177 FLEX4 or FLEX14 call codes are available Codes are 1 or 2 digits 15 MSN Print on SMDR ON OFF OFF Determines if MSN number is printed on SMDR output 16 Print Caller Number ON OFF ON Determines if Caller number is printed on SMDR output 19 SMDR Interface Service ON OFF OFF Determines if SMDR format for CIS India and Korea is used 20 I SMDR Connection Type LAN SIO SIO Determines the Port to be used for SMDR interface service 1 System Time Setting 4 Digits Hr Min sequence ex 11 30 1130 178 2 System Date setting 6 Digits MM DD YY in sequence ex 27Jan 2004 270104 1 Review Linked Station Pairs 10 57 None 179 2 Linked Station Pair Delete 2 Station Numbers Review Linked Station Pairs at FLEX1 sub menu Registration and deletion of Linked Station Pairs at FLEX2 bus menu ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 22 System Timer Programming PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Attendant Recall Timer 00 60 2 Digits 01 Min Determines when call will be disconnected on Attendant No Answer 2 Call Park Recall Timer 000 600 3 Digits 120 Sec Determines amount of time before call p
293. s FLEX4 Seconds Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer Used to repeat the VMIB announce 2 when the timer expires FLEX5 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE VALUES 000 Not Assigned VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Enable Disable Used to enable or disable the VMIB Announce 2 Repeat FLEX6 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 65 PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Overflow Destination Calls to a Station in the group will continue to route until answered or each Station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last Station in the group or will be passed to the overflow Station Group VMIB System Speed Bin after the Overflow Timer expires FLEX7 Destination Type refer to VALUES Range 1 4 HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 Station 2 Hunt 3 VMIB 00 70 00 Not Assigned 4 System Speed 2000 2499 Overflow Timer If the timer expires after a call is received in the group the call will be routed to the Overflow Destination FLEX8 Seconds Range 000 600 HOLD SAVE Wrap up Timer Designates the amount of time a call will be held in a busy state following expiration of the timer FLEX9 Seconds Range 002 999 HOLD SAVE Music Source If a music source is assigned the caller will be able to hear music instead of a ring back tone FL
294. s not allowed max 8 digits may be dialed COS 7 Only Intercom paging emergency calls allowed no dialing allowed on CO Lines COS 8 Assignments in the Exception Table C are monitored for allow and deny numbers COS 9 Assignments in the Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers PBX Dialing Codes There are 5 PBX access codes 2 digits to enter the System and access a CO Line via PBX A CO Line marked as a PBX line will not be governed by any Station or CO Line COS until a recognized PBX code is dialed Exception Table A amp B There are two exception tables with COS each table has 20 allow codes and 10 deny codes a code may have 8 entries Condition COS Rules In Station COS 7 no dialing is allowed to CO Lines In CO COS 5 Station COS 1 6 is ignored and there is not restriction to access CO Lines In CO COS 4 Station COS 106 is ignored and no long distance calls are allowed max 8 digits may be dialed In CO COS 1 it is restricted by Station COS In CO COS 2 and Station COS 2 4 it is restricted by Exception Table A There is no restriction in Station COS 1 3 In Station COS 5 long distance calls not allowed max 8 digits can be dialed CO Line Allow Deny Restriction Rules If there are no entries no restriction is provided by the Table If there are entries in the Deny table then the restriction is on a Deny Only basis If there are entries in the Allow table then the rest
295. s rerouted by the No Answer Forward CCR and if the rerouted destination does not answer calls will follow the Reroute No Answer Destination FLEX7 FLEX1 Range refer to VALUES 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant ring assignment FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group 0 OFF 1 ON 3 3 9 External Control Contact PGM 168 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 168 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 168 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Loud Bell Control LBC If an External Control Contact is assigned to LBC it is activated During night mode LBC1 may be programmed to provide external night ringing In this case LBC1 does not follow the associated Station ring FLEX1 1 Station Number HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 LCB STA 2 RESERVED 3 Ext 1 Door Open External Control Contact can be used when programmed to open a door FLEX1 2 HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 LCB STA 2 DOOR 3 EXT 1 External Relay External Control Contact can be used when programmed for External Relay FLEX1 3 HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 LCB STA 2 RESERVED 3 EXT 1 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 40 3 3 10 LCD Time Date Language Display Mode PGM 169 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TR
296. scription The Loud Bell Control LBC contacts are activated when the assigned Station receives ringing from an incoming CO Line if assigned transferred CO Line or Intercom call Condition Two LBC contacts can be assigned individually to the Station All the contacts may be assigned to the same Station but only the first contact will be activated in the Intercom call The LBC1 can be programmed to be operated as an external night ring contact as well as a LBC contact In the night mode LBC1 will follow UNA refer to Ref A ring assignment and will ignore the Station ring An external ringing device should be attached to the contacts Reference A Universal Night Answer UNA 2 1 6 Admin Programming External Night Ringing PGM 160 FLEX7 Universal Night Answer UNA PGM 141 FLEX8 External Control Contacts PGM 168 100 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 11 Voice Service 2 11 1 Recording system VMIB Announcement Description The Attendant Station can record voice announcements as System Greetings and prompts System greetings should be recorded before use Users can modify prompts ex date and time stamping stored in user s language and contained in VMIB by default Prompts provide assistance to Users for understanding when voice messages are received Operation To record System greetings from the Attendant Station perform the following
297. sed for programming the System A more detailed description of these buttons is included in the LDP 7224D User Guide FIGURE 2 0 KEYSET BUTTON DIAGRAM ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 3 2 1 Entering Programming Mode To enter programming mode perform the following Steps 1 Lift Handset OR 1 Press the MON button on the ADMIN Station the ICM dial tone should be heard 2 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial a confirmation tone should be heard 3 Enter the ADMIN password if a password has been set 4 A confirmation tone should again be heard indicating that the Station is in the ADMIN programming mode Each program is accessed by pressing the TRANS PGM button the following should display ENTER PGM NUMBER 5 Dial the desired three digit program number If an error is made while entering data the TRANS PGM button will return to the previous status NOTE To return to the parent state while ADMIN programming press the CONF button Pressing the CONF button clears temporary data fields The following Table is frequently used in ADMIN programming procedures When entering each range refer to the table as the range is not always mentioned in the procedures SYSTEM RANGE STATION RANGE CO RANGE CO LINE GROUP RANGE REMARK 100 151 01 12 0 8 2 1 1 Permanent Update Procedure To accept changes while programming perform the following Steps 6 Press t
298. shed Not available on SLT Recording operation is cancelled when the Station returns on hook presses the RECORD button again presses the FLASH button or the CO party hangs up This feature is available on SMDI mode only not DTMF mode Not available to Intercom call recording If Pole 3 of the DIP SW1 of the MBU is set to the OFF down position and the System has a VMIU the conversation will be recorded to the VMIU 105 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Admin Programming Two Way Recording PGM 112 FLEX10 2 11 3 2 Two Recording Using VMIB Description Allows a Station to record a conversation in the mailbox by pressing the RECORD button while the Station is talking with a CO party Figure 2 11 3 2 describes Two Way Recording ARIA SOHO CO Extension CO Incoming Conversati STA Press Record button Record STA Do not Record FIGURE 2 11 3 2 TWO WAY RECORDING Operation To program a flexible button as the RECORD button for 2 way recording perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 54 record code 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button To record a conversation while on a call with a CO Line caller perform the following 1 Press the RECORD button to record the conversation to the User s mailbox
299. sing the Handset and the Automatic Release timer expires the call will be cancelled and the Station will receive an error tone Reference A Intercom signal Mode 2 4 13 Admin Programming Automatic Call Release Timer PGM 180 FLEX14 Station Auto Release Timer PGM 182 FLEX5 2 5 4 Class of Service COS Description Each Station and CO Line may be assigned to have different classes to allow or restrict call service The level of COS assignments are programmed at each Station and CO Line Applied dialing restrictions are the result of the interaction of COS assignments as listed in the Class of Service Table 76 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 CLASS OF SERVICE CO LINE OF SERVICE 1 2 3 4 5 1 Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Canned Restricted Unrestricted 2 Table A Table A Table B Canned Restricted Unrestricted 3 Table B Unrestricted Unrestricted Canned Restricted Unrestricted 4 Table A B Table A Table B Canned Restricted Unrestricted 5 Canned Restricted2 Canned Restricted2 Canned Restricted2 Canned Restricted1 Unrestricted 6 Canned Restricted1 Canned Restricted1 Canned Restricted1 Canned Restricted1 Unrestricted 7 Intercom Only Intercom Only Intercom Only Intercom Only Intercom Only 8 Table C Table C Unrestricted Canned Restricted1 Unrestricted
300. starting value and vice versa 10 13 means 10 00 00 AM 01 00 00 PM FLEX3 FLEX1 HH HH 4 digits HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Time Zone1 FLEX2 Time Zone2 FLEX3 Time Zone3 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 70 PGM 220 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Time Zone of Day Zone2 Each time of day Zone2 can use different LCR settings each time of day Zone2 can be grouped up to 3 zones The time not belonging to any zone will be Zone1 by default NOTE LDK accepts 24 as00 if input is 24 as the starting value and vice versa 10 13 means 10 00 00 AM 01 00 00 PM FLEX3 FLEX2 HH HH 4 digits HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Time Zone1 FLEX2 Time Zone2 FLEX3 Time Zone3 Time Zone of Day Zone3 Each time of day Zone3 can use different LCR settings each time of day Zone3 can be grouped up to 3 zones The time not belonging to any zone will be Zone1 by default NOTE LDK accepts 24 as00 if input is 24 as the starting value and vice versa 10 13 means 10 00 00 AM 01 00 00 PM FLEX3 FLEX3 HH HH 4 digits HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Time Zone1 FLEX2 Time Zone2 FLEX3 Time Zone3 Value2 Time HH HH 4 digits 3 7 2 Leading Digit Table PGM 221 The Leading Digit Table is used to check if digits dialed by the User are LCR Code Admin PGM 221 FLEX2 the digits are converted and a CO line is secured according to the DMT Admin PG
301. t VMIB announcement prompt will be heard when a call is off net call forwarded this only applies to calls transferred within the system FLEX13 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Voice Path Connect If this value is set to IMM immediate voice path is connected immediately for CO outgoing calls otherwise calls are connected after dialing digits FLEX14 1 IMM HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON Transfer Tone While a call is transferred to a destination Station if this value is set to RBT transferred Station will hear a ring back tone otherwise MOH will be heard FLEX15 0 RBT HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 RBT 1 MOH ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 32 PGM 160 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS CO to CO Transfer CPT Detection If this value is set to CPT detection a CO to CO transfer connection will be dropped when a tone is detected from the CO to CO transfer connection To detect a tone from the CO line a CPT detection board is required FLEX16 1 CPT Detection HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 No CPT Detection 1 CPT Detection ACD Package Usage Not available in ARIA SOHO If this value is set to ON ACD Information is printable FLEX17 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON CO to CO UC Timer Extend If this value is set to ON the conference call User can extend the Unsupervised Conference Ti
302. t be installed to operate the Door Open feature Up to 4 relays can be used one DPU has two relays to be used for Door Phone Operation To register a Door Open command perform the following Steps 1 Dial the Door Open code refer to values or press the programmed DOOR OPEN button 1st Door Open 1 2nd Door Open 2 3rd Door Open 3 4th Door Open 4 2 Press the TRANS PGM button 3 Press the desired flexible button to be assigned 4 Type 1 1st Door Open 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition A DOOR OPEN flexible button may be programmed Admin Programming External Control Contact PGM 168 Door Open Timer PGM 181 FLEX5 98 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 10 2 Door Phone Description A convenient Intercom box LDP DPB can be connected to the System for receiving Page announcements Intercom calls and signaling assigned Stations on the System Any combination of DKTUs or Intercom boxes can be arranged in the System Figure 2 10 1 describes the operation of Door Phone ICM BOX Door Phone Reception Door Call Button Reception Call Door Open 2 10 1 Conversation FIGURE 2 10 1 DOOR PHONE Operation To call an Intercom box perform the following Steps 1 Lift the Handset or press MON button 2 Dial the Station number of the Intercom box or press th
303. t to RED the redirected CLI is displayed Otherwise the original CLI is displayed when using networking FLEX3 1 RED HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 CLI 1 RED CLI MSG Wait If this value is set to ON the Station can receive CLI messages from an incoming CO call when the station doesn t answer FLEX4 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON DISA Restriction If this value is set to ON the Station is restricted to receiving DISA incoming calls FLEX10 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON CLI Name Display If this value is set to ON the System checks whether the received CLI matches with the speed dial data If it matches the speed dial name is displayed FLEX11 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ISDN CLI Restriction CLIR If this value is set to ON the CLI information is restricted by PX FLEX14 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 15 3 1 6 Flexible Button Assignment PGM 115 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 115 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number or Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM115 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Flex Button Assignment Each flexible button in a Station can be assigned as desired refer to Table 1 FLEX1 03 Ty
304. tation the User may access the CO Line depending on STA COS and CO COS Reference A VMIB Announcement 2 11 1 B Authorization Code 2 5 2 C Class of Service COS 2 5 4 Admin Programming DISA Line Assignment PGM 140 FLEX1 DISA Account Code PGM 141 FLEX3 DISA Retry Counter PGM 160 FLEX4 CO to CO COS Assignment PGM 166 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 2 1 4 Customer Call Routing CCR with VMIB Description CCR is the incoming CO call type of DISA refer to Ref B the User can route the destination by pressing only one digit If User presses a certain digit the corresponding VMIB announcement is played When the User presses the desired digit again call routing is established A User also may access the desired destination by dialing the Station or Hunt Group number or VMIB announcement refer to Ref C Operation When a call is answered by a System programmed with CCR a VMIB announcement should be heard by the caller VMIB announcement gives a choice of destination the caller may select a destination based on the information presented in the VMIB announcement To use DISA CCR perform the following Steps 1 Verify the CO Service Type is set to normal at Admin 140 2 Press FLEX1 3 Verify the DISA Service is set to ON at Admin 140 4 Press FLEX2 refer to Ref C 5 Set VMIB Message number to 01 Admin 140 and press FLEX2 5 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feat
305. tation automatically will be in the same state when the linked Station returns to an idle state the other automatically also returns to idle Condition Up to 13 Linked Pairs are available on the System Any Station can be linked to only one other Station The Intercom number of the linked Stations will be operated as one number for all features The presented number for the linked pair is the first Station number Master which is assigned in Admin Programming The Station attributes of the second Station Slave will follow the attributes of the Master Station ex Day Night COS CO Warning Tone CO Auto Hold Call Cut Off Alarm etc Intercom box DSS DLS cannot be linked with a Station it is operated with the tone mode regardless of the Intercom Answer mode PGM 112 The Attendant Station can be linked with other Stations linked Stations cannot use Attendant features refer to Ref F A Station can call its linked Station by dialing its own number it is possible to make CO Line Intercom Transfer calls between paired Stations Reference A Hold 2 3 3 1 B Call Transfer 2 3 2 C DND 2 4 9 D Call Forward 2 3 1 E Attendant Service 2 13 Admin Programming Linked Station Pairs PGM 179 Station Programming PGM 112 97 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 10 External Device Control 2 10 1 Door Open Description In the ARIA SOHO System DPU mus
306. tem Speed Number Range 2000 2499 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 81 PGM 228 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Internal Page The call ring will page to the designated internal page zones 06 Internal Page Number Range 1 10 HOLD SAVE External Page The call ring will page to the designated external page zones 07 External Page Number 1 HOLD SAVE All Call Page The call ring will page to all page zones 08 VALUE Range 1 2 HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 INT All Page 2 All Page Conference Room The call will be routed to the Conference Room 10 Conference Room Number HOLD SAVE 3 9 3 Executive Secretary Table PGM 229 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 229 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 229 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Executive Secretary Table When the Executive Station designated is in a DND state intercom and transfer calls will be automatically routed to the designated Attendant Station corresponding to the Executive VALUE Range 01 06 Executive Station Attendant Station HOLD SAVE VALUES Default Executive Secretary pairs Not Assigned ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 82 3 9 4 System Speed Zone PGM 232 In this program mode the followin
307. the Supervisor Timer for Queued Call Count 16 ACD Queued Call ON OFF OFF Determines if ACD Queued Calls can be displayed on Supervisor s LCD 17 Maximum Queue Call Count 00 99 99 Determines maximum amount of queued calls allowed for the Group calls received after max attained will be disconnected 18 Supervisor STA Supervisor s Station Number 19 UCD Hunt Station Priority 0 9 1 digit 0 Designates Group Member Priority 0 High 9 Low 20 Hunt Member Forward ON OFF OFF Determines if Station will receive Hunt calls 21 UCD DND Timer 000 999 0 sec Determines if the Queue Count will be displayed on the LCD Ring Group 1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000 999 3 Digits 015 Sec VMIB Announcement played on No Answer Admin PGM191 FLEX3 2 VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000 999 3 Digits 000 Sec 2nd VMIB Announcement played on No Answer Admin PGM191 FLEX4 3 VMIB Announce 1 Location 00 70 2 Digits 00 Not Assigned VMIB Announcement played when timer expires 4 VMIB Announce 2 Location 00 70 2 Digits 00 Not Assigned VMIB Announcement played when 2nd timer expires 5 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 3 Digits 000 Sec VMIB Announcement re played when timer expires Admin PGM191 FLEX5 FLEX6 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual Appendix June 2006 A 27 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat E D ON OFF OFF
308. the directed Line Group and can be used with the CO LINE button Private Line Reference A Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Access CO in 1st CO Group Code PGM 107 FLEX12 B Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Access CO Individual CO Code PGM 107 FLEX8 C Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Access CO Group Code PGM 107 FLEX7 Admin Programming CO Line Choice PGM 160 FLEX3 Inter digit Timer PGM 181 FLEX8 CO Line Group Access PGM 117 CO Line Group PGM 141 FLEX1 Override 1st CO Line Group PGM 161 FLEX3 10 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 2 2 Call Time Restriction Description The Call Time Restriction feature is used to restrict outgoing CO call time In Station programming the User can set the Call Cut Off Timer whereas the call will be disconnected automatically when the timer expires The called and called parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the call is disconnected Condition This feature can be assigned on a station by station basis and is applied to just outgoing CO calls Call Cut Off Timer If the Call Cut Off Timer is enabled on a Station the timer is still applicable when a call is transferred to another Station On the add on conference the Call Cut Off Timer enabled Station will be r
309. tion Open Door function is available 23 Dummy Station ON OFF OFF Determines if Hot Desk function is available 24 Emergency Supervisor ON OFF OFF Determines if Stations can intrude on calls to other Stations in case of Emergency 1 Admin ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Determines Station priority for Admin Programming 2 VMIB Access ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Determines if Station has VMIB access 3 Group Listening ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Determines if MON button can be used for group listening while on a call 4 Override Privilege ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Determines if Stations can override busy System calls 5 SMDR Hidden Dialed Digits ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Determines if SMDR will record dialed numbers 6 Voice Over ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE Determines if a Station can alternate between ICM and a current call 7 Warm Line HOT WARM WARM Determines Line status available for making calls 8 VMIB MSG Retrieve Password ON OFF OFF Must enter password to retrieve VMIB messages 9 VMIB MSG Retrieve Date Time ON OFF ON Determines usage of Time Date when VMIB messages are heard FLEX1 ON OFF OFF 10 Alarm Attribute FLEX2 ON OFF OFF Determines if the Station will receive the Alarm signal 11 Muted Ring Service ON OFF OFF Determines if the Station will receive muted ring signals 12 Call Cut Off Timer 0 99 SEC 0 DISABLE Determines if the calls will be restri
310. tion and provides BLF for off hook and DND User Programmable Flexible Numbering Code Any feature with a dialing code Paging Account Code Call Park etc can be assigned to a flexible button User Programmable Speed Dial Automatically dials Speed number System Station Saved Number Redial Last number Redial User Programmable Group Access Hunt Group Pilot number User Programmable Pool Group Access Some or all outside lines can be grouped pressing this button accesses the highest numbered unused CO Line in that group User Programmable Loop Used to answer a transferred call on a line for which the Station does not have a button assigned User Programmable Station Assignment Allows assignment of Stations and complete flexibility within the System numbering plan A Station can be assigned a number 100 399 4 8 Button Feature code assign refer to Table FEATURE BUTTON FEATURE CODE Conference 91 Call Back 92 DND Forward 93 Flash 94 Mute 95 MON 96 Redial 97 Telephone Number Automatically dials an outside Telephone Number ex LDP 7224 3 soft key 49 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Operation The Flexible Buttons are programmable individually at each key set and are used by pressing the applicable FLEX button To assign a Flexible Button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2
311. tion instead of a Handset The Station can be programmed for Headset operation in place of the Speakerphone mode of operation Operation To change the Station mode between Speakerphone or Headset perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial code 75 3 The Station Answer mode should be displayed on the LCD screen of the phone 4 Dial code 1 Speaker mode or 0 Headset mode To change the Headset Ring mode perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial code 76 3 The Station Answer mode should be displayed on the LCD screen of the phone 4 Dial the applicable code 1 Speaker Ring Only 2 Headset Only 3 Both Condition The intercom signaling mode HF TN PV TRANS PGM 1 2 can be set in the Headset and Speakerphone mode In Headset mode the User can select an incoming ring mode to hear ringing with the Speaker Headset or Both by Admin Programming The Station will receive paging with the Station Speaker To Answer an intercom call in Tone mode the User should press the MON button When an intercom call is received in Privacy mode the Station will be muted automatically the User should press the MUTE button to answer the intercom call Admin Programming Headset Ring Mode PGM 111 FLEX10 Speakerphone Headset PGM 111 FLEX11 51 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June
312. to Background Music BGM through the speaker while the handset while the handset is on hook and the line is in an idle state Music from the source is heard over the Station Speaker and will be automatically shut off when a call or paging announcement is received or when the Station is off hook Operation To assign BGM to a Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 73 the available music should be heard To transmit BGM on an external page port from the Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 076 External Port 3 Dial the BGM channel number the selected background music should be heard 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button 5 After hearing the confirmation tone the Station should go to an idle state and the selected background music will be transmitted to an External Port To transmit BGM through the intercom box from an Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 075 3 Dial the BGM channel number and the selected background music should be heard 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button 5 After hearing the confirmation tone the Station should go to an idle state and the selected background music will be transmitted over the intercom box Condition When lifting the handset or pressing the MON button at a Station the music is automatically shut off When external music is
313. to an idle state the Intercom ring is received Condition A Station can leave only one Call Back or message a new request will override the previous one Message wait data will be protected in the event of a power failure When dialing a Station number instead of pressing the CALLBK button to answer a message wait the message wait will be cancelled at the calling Station The Message Wait Reminder tone is programmable from 00 to 60 min if a tone is not wanted the timer may be set to 00 The Message Wait Reminder tone is not heard at a busy Station The Message Wait Reminder tone will continue until all the messages are retrieved When a Station attempts to leave a message at a Station an error tone will be heard when VMIB access is allowed at the Station after recording a VMIB message it turns into a normal message at the Station In this case the error tone will not be provided at the attempting Station Reference A Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Message Wait Call Back Enable code PGM 106 FLEX13 FLEX14 B Intercom Signal Mode 2 4 13 C DND 2 4 8 2 4 16 Music On Hold MOH Description When a CO call is placed on Hold refer to Ref A the external party will hear Music On Hold MOH MOH is supplied through various music sources Music can be played to any party on Hold The following music sources may be available Internal Music External Music SLT MOH
314. ts Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 73 3 7 4 LCR Table Initialization PGM 223 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 223 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table below PGM 223 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Removal Position Changes the index of DMT value for Day Zone1 to the new value FLEX1 VALUE 6 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Day Zone1 FLEX2 Day Zone2 FLEX3 Day Zone3 FLEX4 CO Line Group Change FLEX5 ALT Change FLEX6 All LCR Database Initialize Day Zone 2 Changes the index of DMT value for Day Zone2 to the new value FLEX2 VALUE 6 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Day Zone1 FLEX2 Day Zone2 FLEX3 Day Zone3 FLEX4 CO Line Group Change FLEX5 ALT Change FLEX6 All LCR Database Initialize Day Zone 3 Changes the index of DMT value for Day Zone3 to the new value FLEX3 VALUE 6 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Day Zone1 FLEX2 Day Zone2 FLEX3 Day Zone3 FLEX4 CO Line Group Change FLEX5 ALT Change FLEX6 All LCR Database Initialize CO Line Group Change all CO Line Group Values of DMT entry to the new value FLEX4 VALUE 6 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Day Zone1 FLEX2 Day Zone2 FLEX3 Day Zone3 FL
315. ttendant refer to Ref A B The Attendant will receive the Recall ring for a time equal to the Attendant Recall timer PGM 180 FLEX1 If the Attendant doesn t answer the CO call before the timer expires the CO call will be disconnected Condition If the Attendant of an Intercom Tenancy group is unassigned the CO call will recall to the System Attendant When a call in Exclusive Hold is recalled to the Attendant the call will be placed in System Hold refer to Ref A A Private CO Line will not be recalled to the Attendant refer to Ref D Reference A Hold 2 3 3 1 B Call Transfer 2 3 2 C Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 14 D Private Line 2 2 9 Admin Programming Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX1 I Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX5 2 13 7 Change LCD Date Time Display Description The Attendant can change the LCD Date Time Display format of Stations on the System Date MM DD YY DD MM YY ex August 4th 1006 08 04 06 gt 04 08 06 Time 12H 24H ex Eight Thirty at night 08 30 PM gt 20 30 Operation To change the LCD Date format toggle perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 044 To change LCD Time format toggle perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 045 Admin Programming LCD Time Date Language Display Mode PGM 169 119 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Man
316. ttendant resource Attendant Traffic report The measurement time type can be one of Today s peak time Yesterday s peak time Last hour Yesterday s total and Today s total It provides the following information fields Analysis Start Hour Starting time of hour duration which the data is recorded Attendant Number The Station number of Attendant Total Calls The number of total incoming calls except CO ring group call hold recall ring Calls answered The number of answered calls by all active Attendants during the measuring hour Calls Abandoned The number of calls which ring at the Attendant Station that are dropped before the Attendant answers Calls Held Abandoned The number of calls dropped while the call is being held Calls Held The number of calls answered by the Attendant and placed on hold Time Available The time duration which the Attendants don t answer calls but are available to handle new calls measured in minutes Time Talk The total time during measuring interval Attendants are active or converse on a CO Line Talk time is not started until the call is answered by an Attendant The duration of time between call termination and answering by the Attendant is not accumulated as Time Available or Time Talk Time Held The total amount of time which Attendants have calls on hold Time No Answer The average amount of time that calls in queue
317. ture Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 4 19 On Hook Dialing Description A Station can make a call without lifting the Handset by using the Speakerphone or Monitor mode If this feature does not operate verify if the Speakerphone is enabled or disabled On hook dialing is not available on all keysets Operation To use on hook dialing perform the following Steps 1 Verify the Auto Speaker Selection is ON 2 Assign CO Line Intercom Speed Dial to a flexible button 3 Press the flexible button 4 Then it is operated immediately OR 1 Verify the Auto Speaker Selection is OFF 2 Assign CO Line Intercom Speed Dial to a flexible button 3 Press the flexible button 4 LIFT HANDSET should be displayed on the LCD lift Handset or press the MON button to operate Admin Programming Auto Speaker Selection PGM 111 FLEX1 2 4 20 Station Name Description Each Station may be assigned with a name up to 12 characters and a System and Station Speed number up to 16 characters The System will allow Station Users to dial Station numbers by entering a name that has been programmed for the Station via intercom When the names are programmed in the digital display key set the User may select a Station or Speed Dial number by the name Operation To register a Station Name perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Type 74 Station Name code 3 Enter the name to be used
318. ty Setting Pick up Priority PGM 173 2 3 4 2 Group Call Pick up Description A Station can pick up a call ringing at another Station in the same pick up group Ringing intercom calls incoming CO Lines recalling CO Lines and transferred CO Lines can be answered by a Station instead of the ringing Station if the Stations belong to the same pick up Group refer to Ref A Operation To answer a call ringing at a Station in the same Pick up Group perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Dial the Group Pick up code 566 refer to Ref B 38 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 To assign a GROUP CALL PICK UP button at a flexible button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Type 566 refer to Ref B 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition An intercom call cannot be picked up at a Station in Hold or Park mode A CO LOOP or POOL button is required to pick up a CO Line call Queued callback and private line cannot be picked up A Station can answer an Intercom call placed to an ICM box using Group Call Pick up When several calls are queued at a Station or Hunt Group the pick up order depends on Pick up Priority PGM 173 When the same type of CO Lines are queued the first queued CO Line is picked up Group call pick up is allowed w
319. ual June 2006 2 13 8 Day Night Service Description When a CO call is received in the System the destination of the CO call can be changed according to the time There are 5 ring modes Day Night Weekend On Demand and Automatic ring mode The Destination of a CO call can be set differently for each ring mode while a User sets the destination of CO calls with Admin Programming refer to Ref A During the Day Night or Weekend modes the User can set the desired destination of incoming CO calls On Demand mode is set up for specific calls Automatic ring mode is set and used according to the Weekly Time Table PGM 233 Only the Attendant can change the ring mode Operation To change ring mode perform the following Steps 1 Press the DND FOR button from the Attendant Station the ring mode will effectively be changed to Day gt On Demand gt Night gt Weekend gt Automatic Ring mode gt Day in sequence To activate Automatic ring mode perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 074 3 Dial 1 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To deactivate Automatic ring mode perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 074 3 Dial 0 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition The default value of the Weekly Time Table is as shown entry number 00 The first table entry 00 is for Main Attendants and others are 01 15 for Intercom Tenancy group Att
320. um local call digit count it will be regarded as a long distance call max local call digit count is programmable and the default value is 7 The SMDR output records contain the following 111 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 5 digit Station call originator field terminating for incoming 3 digit used CO line field 8 digit call duration field HH MM SS 8 digit year month day field YY MM DD 5 digit time of day call originator field 1 digit call identification digit first digit in digit dial field 18 digit collected dial digit field 2 digit account group number field 5 digit pulse metering count field 10 digit call cost field 12 digit account code field When the SMDR storage ports are almost exhausted the system gives a Buffer Full warning signal to the Attendant the LCD of the Attendant Station will indicate how many SMDR records remain in storage for some intervals Some Stations can be grouped to count the billing with a SMDR receipt using a SMDR account group The SLT DTMF RLS TMR should be adjusted to reasonable value in order to print all digits that the SLT dialed Admin Programming SMDR Attributes PGM 177 Metering Unit PGM 142 FLEX3 SLT DTMF RLS Timer PGM 181 FLEX13 SMDR Local Code Table PGM 204 2 12 1 Lost Call Print Out Description Lost call means that the caller disconn
321. unt Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS VMIB Announce 1 Timer If the call is not answered during the timer the System will play the VMIB announcement that is programmed FLEX1 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Timer The second VMIB announcement will be played if the call continues to wait beyond the 2nd Announcement Timer FLEX2 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 1 Location Used to play the VMIB announcement when the VMIB Announce 1 Timer expires FLEX3 Seconds Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Location Used to play the VMIB announcement when the VMIB Announce 2 Timer expires FLEX4 Seconds Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer Used to repeat the VMIB announce 2 when the timer expires FLEX5 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE VALUES 000 Not Assigned VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Enable Disable Used to enable or disable the VMIB Announce 2 Repeat FLEX6 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 62 PGM 191 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Overflow Destination Calls to a Station in the group will continue to route until answered or each Station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last Station in the group or will be
322. up to 12 characters refer to Button Map 58 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Q 11 Z 12 13 1 10 A 21 B 22 C 23 2 20 D 31 E 32 F 33 3 30 G 41 H 42 I 43 4 40 J 51 K 52 L 53 5 50 M 61 N 62 O 63 6 60 P 71 Q 72 R 73 S 74 7 70 T 81 U 82 V 83 8 80 W 91 X 92 Y 93 Z 9 9 90 1 Blank 2 3 0 00 BUTTON MAP 4 Press HOLD SAVE to accept changes To access dial by name perform the following Steps 1 Press the SPEED button twice 2 Dial the desired directory 1 3 refer to values 1 Intercom 2 Station Speed Dial 3 System Speed Dial 3 A confirmation tone should be heard 4 The stored names in the Speed bin are displayed in alphabetical order NOTE the up and down arrows can be used to locate the desired name To search a name by entering a character perform the following Steps 1 While 2 names are displayed on the LCD enter the alpha numeric data refer to the Button Map 2 The LCD displays 2 names which start with the entered character the cursor will point to the first name in the LCD 3 When entering more alpha numeric data then the LCD will display names that start with the updated input NOTE to delete the last letter of input press the CALLBK button The up
323. ure Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition The CCR feature is only supported for DISA If a caller dials a full destination number the call will be directly routed to the desired destination by the System Numbering Plan If a caller dials one digit then pauses the ARIA SOHO System will compare the digit with the CCR table If a matching digit is found on the CCR Table and the bin number is the same as the VMIB Announcement the call will be routed to the programmed destination If the dialed digit is invalid the caller can attempt to redial up to 3 times the DISA Retry Counter is also programmable When the DISA Retry Counter is exceeded the call will be routed to the recall destination or disconnected following an error tone VMIB announcement 01 70 may be used for CCR Call routing will be operated with the previously programmed VMIB Announcement The maximum CCR depth is 10 The external User can dial alternate digits while the VMIB Announcement is being played or the digits should be entered within the Inter Digit Time 5sec after the announcement is ended If the caller does not dial any digits within the Inter Digit Time 5sec the call will be routed to the Assigned Ring Station or disconnected following an error tone If a User presses the button while CCR is in operation CCR will return to the previous Step The call will be dropped directly after the VMIB announcement if VMIB Drop is selected a
324. ure a CO Line and dial the number of the external party that will receive the call 4 When ringing is heard at the called party replace the handset and go on hook To conduct a Screened CO Line transfer perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 The intercom dial tone should be heard and the call will be placed on hold 3 Secure a CO Line and dial the number of the external party that will receive the call 4 When the called party answers announce the call then replace the handset and go on hook Condition For this feature CO Lines transferred CO Line and transferring CO Line must be able to detect loop lost or disconnection condition If the transferred CO Line doesn t have answer information analog CO recalling will not be presented when the call is not answered the call will be disconnected after the Unsupervised Conference timer expires Pressing the original CO line button while making a transfer to an external number screened transfer will disconnect the outgoing call and connects the original incoming call If a transfer is made while dialing on a CO Line the dialing will not be transmitted 32 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Admin Programming Transfer Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX7 I Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX5 Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX1 Open Loop Detect Timer PGM 142 FLEX13
325. used Operation A private line will operate as a normal CO Line except access is limited to assigned Stations Condition Private Line cannot be picked up Admn Programming CO Line Group PGM 141 FLEX1 24 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 2 3 Rerouting 2 3 1 Call Forward Description A Station User can forward calls to any Station Station Group or VMIB in the system by activating feature codes There are several types of Call Forwarding Unconditional Busy No answer Busy No Answer Unconditional Station Off Net Call Forward with Telephone Number No Answer Station Off Net Call Forward with Telephone Number Incoming CO Off Net Call Forward and Follow Me Call Forward Operation To activate Call Forward follow Operation directions in each sub heading for this section To program Call Forward to a Flexible Button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS FOR button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS FOR button 4 Assign the Call Forward type 1 Call Forward Unconditional 2 Call Forward Busy 3 Call Forward No Answer 4 Call Forward Busy No Answer 5 Unconditional Station Off Net Call Forward 6 No Answer Station Off Net Call Forward 7 Incoming CO Off Net Call Forward 8 Unconditional Station Off Net Call Forward with Telephone Number 9 No Answer Station Off Net Call Forward with
326. using system Speed dial from a SLT perform the following 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Speed Dial access code 558 refer to Ref C 3 Dial the System Speed Dial bin 23 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Condition System Speed Dial is restricted by Station COS A max of 24 digits are allowed in a System Speed Dial number including other applicable digits and special function codes An error tone will be heard when an empty Speed Dial bin is dialed If a CO Line is selected prior to entering a Speed Dial bin number the chosen CO Line will still be used regardless of the programmed CO Line in the bin number If all lines in the Group are busy a busy tone indication should be heard when attempting to access a System Speed dial number System Speed Dial numbers are protected when the System is powered OFF Reference A CO Dial Tone Detect Admin 160 FLEX6 B Refer to ARIA SOHO Hardware Description and Installation Manual Speed Dial Access Code Admin 106 FLEX18 Admin Programming Speed Dial Access PGM 112 FLEX9 System Speed Zone PGM 232 CO Dial Tone Detect PGM 160 FLEX6 2 2 9 Private Line Description CO Lines in the System can be assigned for exclusive use by one or more DKTU Users Private lines are assigned to CO Line Group 00 and an appearance Flexible CO button is required at the DKTU LOOP or POOL buttons cannot be
327. ute calls to another Station Group or VMIB when the Station is busy and or does not answer in a predefined No Answer time Incoming CO Lines transferred CO Lines and ringing intercom calls are forwarded Operation To activate Call Forward when the line is busy or there is no answer perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward code 4 4 Dial Station or Group or VMIB number to receive the call To use Call Forward no answer on a pre assigned flexible button 1 Press the assigned flexible button 2 The LED of DND FOR button will flash and the function assigned to the flexible button will be activated 2 3 1 5 Call Forward Station Off Net Unconditional No Answer Description Stations allowed to forward calls can forward intercom and transferred CO Line calls to a directory number telephone number outside of the System When a call is received the System will access an outgoing CO Line and dial the telephone number entered by the User If a Station assigned Off Net Call Forward receives a call from an internal and or external caller the call will be forwarded to Off Net unconditionally code 5 or after No Answer Ring timer expires code 6 27 ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 2 Feature Description and Operation Manual June 2006 Operation To activate unconditional Off Net Call Forward perform the following St
328. values 3 1 1 Station amp DSS DLS Map ID PGM110 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 110 3 Enter the appropriate Station number or Station Range 4 Following the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM110 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE COMMENTS Station ID Assignment The Station ID can be changed to the desired value which is different from the default value i e normal DKTU normal SLT FLEX1 01 Station ID HOLD SAVE VALUES 01 DKTU 05 ICM Box 06 Reserved 07 SLT DTMF 08 FLT PULSE 09 RESERVED 10 RESERVED 11 RESERVED 12 CLT CID FSK 13 SLT CID DTMF DSS DLS One Station can have up to3 sequentially numbered multiple DSS DLS maps FLEX1 02 Station ID FLEX2 Station Number HOLD SAVE VALUES 02 DSS Map 1 03 DSS Map 2 04 DSS Map 3 INITIAL BUTTON CONFIGURATIONS FOR DSS DLS MAP ITEM DEFAULT REMARK DSS DLS Map1 Buttons 1 to 12 Button 1 Intrusion Button 2 All Call Page Button 3 Call Park 01 Button 4 Station Group 1 Button 5 Camp On Button 6 Internal All Call Page Button 7 Call Park 02 Button 8 Station Group 2 Button 9 Group Call Pickup Button Button 10 External Page ARIA SOHO Version 1 Issue 0 3 ADMIN Programming Manual June 2006 7 ITEM DEFAULT REMARK Button 11 Call Park 03 Button 12 Station Group 3 Buttons 13 to 48 Station Ports 10

Aria Soho user manual - MBC

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents